JP2020072922A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine configured not to obstruct a display of a display device.SOLUTION: A pachinko slot machine 1 includes a panel device for illumination array, on a front face of a liquid crystal display device 11, for displaying an image according to a latent image 402 associated with light-emission of an LED 403. When there is a request to display a non-performance image such as a menu screen and an error screen on the liquid crystal display device 11, while an image according to the latent image 402 is currently displayed on the panel device 400, the pachinko slot machine 1 stops the image display on the panel device 400 by stopping the light emission of the LED 403 in the panel device 400 and causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the non-performance image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 130

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and in particular, in recent years, not only the display device but also other devices (for example, A game machine that produces an effect using a character is also known. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that performs an effect and a display by interlocking a display device and a movable body that can move to a position where a part of the display device overlaps.

JP, 2014-200614, A

  In such a gaming machine, while the performance is being executed, the display device and other devices are linked to each other and no inconvenience occurs. However, the presence of another device may make it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the display device (for example, notification of an error or display of a menu screen), and the presence of the other device may be an obstacle.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not disturb the display of the display device.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an image, a transparent panel (for example, a light guide plate 401) provided on the front surface of the display device, and a plate surface of the transparent panel. A light-emitting device (for example, LED 403) that emits light along with it, a light-emission control unit (for example, sub-control circuit 101, panel control board 79) that controls the light emission of the light-emitting device, and an operation unit that receives a player's operation (for example, A selection button 18, an enter button 19), menu display means for displaying a menu screen on the display device based on an operation by the operation means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11), and the menu screen And a detection unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that detects a call request, and the light emission control unit issues a light emission output request based on the effect data. The light emission output control includes a performance executing means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a light emission output control means (for example, a panel control board 79) that causes the light emitting device to emit light in response to an output request from the performance executing means. When the detecting unit detects the call request while the output request is being received from the effect executing unit, the light emitting device is turned off by prioritizing the call request over the output request for the specific area, and the specifying is performed. For areas other than the area, the light emitting device is caused to emit light in response to an output request, and the effect executing means is based on effect data regardless of whether the detecting means detects the request to call the menu screen. It is characterized in that a light emission output request is made.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the light emission output control means is triggered by a lapse of a predetermined time after the detection means detects a request for calling the menu screen, and the specific area of the light emitting device. It is characterized by restarting the light emission in.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disturb the display of the display device.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram of a display device included in the pachi-slot. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachi-slot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is an exploded view of a rotating accessory of the pachi-slot. It is a perspective view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the neutral position. It is a perspective view of a rotating accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is rotated to the right. It is the perspective view which looked at the eyeball member, the left eye corner member, and the right eye corner member of the above-mentioned pachi-slot from the back. It is a top view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the neutral position. FIG. 6 is a top view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot starts rotating rightward from the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a bottom view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the neutral position. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot starts rotating rightward from the neutral position. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the rotary accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the rightmost maximum movement position. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the transition conditions of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachi-slot. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the internal carryover combination storing area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the press order storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a symbol code storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the sub-control circuit of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence relationship between the classification of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachi-slot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the management method of the production ball in the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram of the transfer lottery during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a start ART lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a start ART lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a start ART lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse actuation random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a MAP data correspondence table showing MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP. It is a diagram showing an apocalypse act time production ball lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is the figure which shows the outline of the promotion method of the production ball which is used during the normal game state and the high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the accessory movable lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the production ball promotion lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of a reel stop memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game during the high probability game state of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the CZ of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the CZ_MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a CZ_MAP correspondence table which shows the CZ mode defined by CZ_MAP. It is a figure which shows the invalid point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the CZ during production ball lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence relationship between the classification of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachi-slot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the BB of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of BB start memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the BB middle mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the BB middle mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of the end of BB stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game during ART of the pachi-slot. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game during ART of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART state random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a diagram showing a boss MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot. It is a boss MAP data correspondence table showing the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the production ball upgrade lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the enemies determination ART intermediate team power addition lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the boss power lottery table in the enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a boss status correspondence table showing the status of the opponent in the battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table showing the battle MAP data defined in the battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART state random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the ART state random determination table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows the above-mentioned pachi-slot bonus end check processing. It is a flow chart which shows the above-mentioned pachi-slot bonus operation check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the display method of the non-production image in panel display. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is the flowchart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub CPU of the aforementioned pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows CZ * ART lottery processing at the time of a normal start of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the apocalypse actuation process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows the high probability game state shift processing of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows high probability middle production registration processing of the sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing during BB of a sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the enemy determination ART of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the battle ART of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receipt of a winning operation command of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows CZ / ART lottery processing at the time of normal end of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability shift determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability completion determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result management process during CZ of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receiving a bonus end command of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the rewriting method of the effect ball used during enemy determination ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the pachi-slot of another embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing during BB of a sub CPU of a pachi-slot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot of another embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing in the BB of the sub CPU of the pachi-slot of another execution form.

  Hereinafter, a pachi-slot showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied in addition to medals. Further, in the present embodiment, the replay probability becomes higher than the normal time during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like and a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which RT and RT simultaneously operate will be described.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachi-slot 1 to the player is referred to as the front side of the pachi-slot 1, the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side, and the right side and the left side as viewed from the player are the right side of the pachi-slot 1. (Right direction) and left side (left direction) respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction.

[Pachislot functional flow]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachi-slot 1, when a player inserts a medal and the start lever 16 is operated, one value (from 0 to 65535) of a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determination means (main CPU 93 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means has a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game on the start lever 16 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). Determine the internal winning combination.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the pay line described later is determined. In addition, as a type of the combination of symbols, there are provided a privilege that is given to the player such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonus, etc. Has been.

  Subsequently, when the player presses the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 described later) causes the internal winning combination. Based on the timing when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed, the control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

  Here, in the pachi-slot 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

  Reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination allowing the display of the combination of symbols related to winning is determined, by utilizing the above specified time, the combination of the symbols follows the winning line as an effective line. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that the display is as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for symbol combinations that are not allowed to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the specified time is used to reel in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it will not be displayed along the winning line. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

  In this way, when the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are all stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line is related to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether or not the winning combination is established based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the winning line, based on the fact that the reel stop control means stops the variation of the symbols. Then, when it is determined that the game is related to the winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is called a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is called a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine, in the above-described series of flows, image display performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, driving of a rotating accessory, Alternatively, various effects are performed by utilizing these combinations.

  When the start lever is operated, a random number value for rendering (hereinafter, a random number value for rendering) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect content to be executed this time from the plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control circuit described later plays a role of this effect content determination means.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in association with each trigger such as the start of the rotation of the reel, the stop of the rotation of each reel, the determination of the presence or absence of the winning. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed for) by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachi-slot]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the display device 10 of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The outer casing 2 has a cabinet 2a as a housing for housing reels, circuit boards, etc., and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 2c is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 2c is a recess that is used when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, a plurality (three in this embodiment) of reels 3L, 3C, 3R (FIG. 3) in which a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. (See) is contained. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel main body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel main body. The above-mentioned plural (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the above-mentioned sheet material.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9 and a display device 10 that displays a predetermined effect. The door body 9 is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  Further, the front door 2b has a display window 4 through which the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R can be visually recognized. The display window 4 is composed of three left display windows 4L corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R. These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement regions of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are arranged continuously from the plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is stopped. The size is set so that three symbols can be displayed. That is, in the frames of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. Then, in the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning line for determining whether or not to win.

<Overview of display device 10>
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 3, the display device 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 11 and a panel device 400 provided on the front surface (player side) of the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, by causing the liquid crystal display device 11 and the panel device 400 to cooperate with each other, the display device 10 displays an image related to a game effect and information about the game.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 executes effects by displaying an image, and also when, for example, customization of the pachi-slot 1 or game table information such as a game history (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a menu screen) or an error in the pachi-slot 1. It is possible to display an error screen for notifying the clerk of the game shop of the error content. The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 along with the execution of the effect may be referred to as an “effect image”, and an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the effect, such as a menu screen or an error screen. It may be called a "non-production image".

  The panel device 400 is a so-called illumina array (registered trademark) panel device, and includes a transparent light guide plate 401 and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 403 arranged laterally of the light guide plate 401. The light guide plate 401 is a transmissive transparent panel made of an acrylic material or the like. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light guide plate 401 is provided with a plurality of recesses (reflection recesses 402a) each having a reflective surface that reflects light along the plate surface to the player side. A latent image 402 shown in FIG. 3A is formed by the recess 402a.

  The LED 403 is arranged laterally of the light guide plate 401 and emits light along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401. As such an LED 403, an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are linearly provided is preferably used. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light emitted along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401 in accordance with the light emission of the LED 403 is reflected to the front surface (the player side) by the reflection concave portion 402a and is formed by the reflection concave portion 402a. The latent image 402 can be visually recognized by the player.

  In such a display device 10, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the LED 403 does not emit light, the player cannot see the latent image 402, and the player can see the light guide plate 401 transparent. It will be recognized as a board. As a result, in the display device 10, an effect is performed according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  On the other hand, when the LED 403 is emitting light, the plurality of reflection recesses 402a reflect light toward the player, so that the latent image 402 is visualized as shown in FIG. 3C and the game is played. Visible to the person. In such a case, in the display device 10, an effect using the panel device 400 or an effect in which the panel device 400 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are linked is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 401 is depicted with a latent image 402 indicating the characters “CHANGE!”, But the latent image 402 is not limited to such characters, and other characters may be used. Alternatively, an image such as a face of a character may be drawn in addition to the character.

  Returning to FIG. 2, a protective glass 6 is provided on the front side of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 described above. As a result, the player cannot directly touch the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 (the liquid crystal display device 11 or the panel device 400).

  A decorative member 7 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door body 9 so as to surround the protective glass 6. The decorative member 7 constitutes a part of the exterior of the pachi-slot 1, and includes an upper exterior member 7a, a pair of side exterior members 7b, and a lower exterior member 7c. In particular, the upper exterior member 7a is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 11 and in front of the rotary accessory 200 described later.

  A pedestal portion 12 is formed at the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 has various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, select button 18, enter button, which are objects to be operated by the player. 19) is provided.

  The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals that are dropped from the outside by the player onto the pachi-slot 1. That is, the medal insertion slot 13 is for the player to insert medals. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, 3) being the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number should be deposited inside the pachi-slot 1. It is possible (so-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of coins to be used for one game from the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. The settlement button is provided to pull out (discard) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside. The start lever 16 is for starting the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R) in response to the operation of the player.

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation of the player. ..

  Further, these stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are adapted to be used when performing an operation regarding information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and for example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are referred to as the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The selection button 18 and the enter button 19 are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (for example, calling the menu screen or operations on the menu screen). Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 including 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 28 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits) as a privilege. indicate.

  A medal payout opening 21, a medal receiving tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R, and the like are provided below the door body 9. The medal payout port 21 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 21. Further, the speakers 23L and 23R output sound effects and music such as music corresponding to the effect contents.

  A waist panel 29 is provided between the pedestal 12 and the medal tray 22, and the waist panel 29 displays various information such as the model name of the pachi-slot 1 and the role configuration.

<Electrical structure of pachi-slot machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub-control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b. A reel relay terminal plate 51, a setting key type switch 52, a cabinet side relay substrate 53, a door relay terminal plate 54, and a power supply substrate 44b of a power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control substrate 41. ing.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor.

  The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. An external centralized terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

  The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a, and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates a medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage switch is full of medals. A power switch 44a is connected to the power board 44b of the power device 44.

  When the power switch 44a is ON, the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, and the power supply device 44 supplies necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. When the power switch 44a is OFF, the power of the pachi-slot 1 is cut off, and the power supply from the power supply device 44 to the pachi-slot 1 is stopped. The door relay terminal board 54 has a medal sensor 46, a door opening / closing monitor switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, a selection switch 67, a decision switch 68 and a sub switch. The relay board 69 is connected.

  That is, the medal sensor 46, the door opening / closing monitor switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the decision switch 68 and the sub relay board 69 are the doors. It is connected to the main control board 41 via a relay terminal board 54.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that a medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door opening / closing monitor switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the player has pressed the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) is pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when receiving the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when performing the replay. It is a substrate for making. The 7-segment display 28 and the LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70 illuminates, for example, a mark that indicates the start of a game or a mark that performs a replay.

  The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button 18 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The decision switch 68 detects that the decision button 19 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. Then, the main control board 41 outputs the detection result output from the selection switch 67 or the decision switch 68 to the sub control board 42 as necessary.

  The sub relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. In addition, the sub relay board 69 relays wiring that connects the sub control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub control board 42. That is, the sub control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78 are electrically connected to the sub relay board 69. There is.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via a door relay terminal board 54 and a sub relay board 69. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78 via the sub relay board 69. ing.

  The sound I / O board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 causes the LED group 25, which is a specific example of the light source, to emit light in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6) to display a blinking pattern. The LED board 72 controls the LED group 25 that illuminates the waist panel 29 and the decorative member 7, and the LEDs provided on the rotary accessory 200.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 stores a history of opening / closing of the front door 2b. Further, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

  The rotating accessory object control board 78 drives the rotating accessory object 200 according to the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6). The rotary accessory 200 is driven and controlled by the rotary accessory control board 78 to rotationally drive an eyeball member 205 described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 and the rotary accessory control board 78 constitute accessory control means, and the eyeball member 205 is a rotary accessory according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101. The drive is controlled by the control board 78.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76, a liquid crystal relay substrate 77, and a panel control substrate 79 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge board 76 is a board for managing image (video) for presentation, sound, light (LED group 25), driving of the rotating accessory 200, and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The panel control board 79 is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 42 and the LEDs 403 that form the panel device 400, and executes a plurality of types of illumination display using the panel device 400. The panel control board 79 is provided with a drive circuit for inputting data which is the basis of the light emission mode from the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6) of the sub control board 42, and by outputting an LED control signal to the LED 403, An image corresponding to the latent image 402 is displayed on the panel device 400 in various modes.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the main control circuit 91 as a main control unit has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component, and controls the progress of the game.

  The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95. The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has rotated once. The reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R with an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R makes the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) having a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) of pulse output required to rotate one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detector (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, the number of symbols rotated after the reel index is detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position at which the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle stage of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle stage of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 101 as the sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and determines or executes the effect contents based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. And other peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the rotating accessory 200, various LEDs, and the speakers 23L and 23R.

  The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106. The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, light, and driving of the rotary accessory 200 in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The ROM cartridge board 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area. A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area.

  For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and a performance registration task for extracting a random number value for performance and determining and registering the performance content (performance data). Is included. In addition, a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a role control task that controls the rotary accessory 200, a lamp control task that controls the light output by the LED light source, A voice control task and the like for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers 23L and 23R are included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation. In addition, a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on / off light, and the like are included.

  The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub RAM 103 is configured to include a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as a work area and a backup SRAM (Static RAM). When the power is turned on, various data stored in the SRAM is copied to the DRAM so that the sub control circuit Various information used in 101 is restored to the contents when the power was turned off.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the sub CPU 102 drives the rotary accessory 200 based on the accessory movement data specified by the effect contents.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

<Structure of rotating accessory>
Next, the rotating accessory 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 7 to 16. The rotary accessory 200 of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the rotary accessory 200 is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot 1 with respect to the display device 10. The rotary accessory 200 includes a cover member 198 that can be opened and closed vertically. The cover member 198 constitutes the movable part of the present invention. Further, in front of the cover member 198, a transparent lens 199 (not shown) is provided so that the rotating accessory 200 is not directly touched by the player.

  When the cover member 198 is opened, as shown in FIG. 8, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotary accessory 200 is exposed. When the cover member 198 is closed, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotary accessory 200 becomes invisible to the player. The rotary accessory 200 is an accessory (gimmick) imitating eyes, the cover member 198 corresponds to an eyelid, and the eyeball main body 203 corresponds to an eyeball. Further, the cover member 198 is opened and closed vertically by an actuator such as a motor (not shown).

  7 to 9, the rotary accessory 200 includes an upper base 202, an eyeball body 203, and a lower base 204.

  The eyeball main body 203 is provided at the eyeball member 205 extending in the left-right direction of the pachi-slot 1, the left eye corner member 206 provided at one end in the extension direction of the eyeball member 205, and the other end in the extension direction of the eyeball member 205. The right outer corner member 207 is provided. The rotation direction and the left-right direction of the eyeball member 205 are the rotation direction and the left-right direction viewed from the player.

  The eyeball member 205 is formed in a hemispherical shape having an arc surface 205A along the extending direction, and an image 205a simulating the eyeball is formed on the arc surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is rotatable in the left-right direction along the arc surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is composed of a lens.

  The left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are arranged in a position where the outer corner member 205 and the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are overlapped with each other when the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are not engaged with each other. In addition, the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are provided so as to overlap behind the eyeball member 205 as viewed from the player side. Specifically, the rear ends of the left outer corner members 206 and the right outer corner members 207 are located rearward of the rear ends of the eyeball members 205 in the width direction.

  The front ends of the left eye corner members 206 and the right eye corner members 207 are installed in front of the eyeball members 205 so as to cover both end sides of the eyeball members 205 in the extending direction, and are rotatable relative to the eyeball members 205. Has become. Engagement protrusions 206A and 207A are formed on the back surfaces of the left and right outer corner members 206 and 207, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, an engagement protrusion 205B is formed at one end (left end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engagement protrusion 205B can be engaged with the engagement protrusion 206A formed on the back surface of the left outer corner member 206.

An engaging projection 205C is formed on the other end (right end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engagement protrusion 205C can be engaged with the engagement protrusion 207A formed on the back surface of the right outer corner member 207.

  The engagement protrusion 206A of the left outer corner portion member 206 is located inward of the engagement protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. As a result, when the eyeball member 205 rotates to the right, which is one side of the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A. Then, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates rightward, the left outer corner member 206 moves rightward together with the eyeball member 205.

The engaging protrusion 207A of the right outer corner member 207 is located inward of the engaging protrusion 205C of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. As a result, when the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left, which is the other side in the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205C engages with the engagement protrusion 207A. Then, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates to the left, the right outer corner member 207 moves leftward together with the eyeball member 205.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a projecting plate 208 is provided on the back surface of the eyeball member 205, and the projecting plate 208 projects rearward from the back surface of the eyeball member 205. Three boss portions 208A (only the central boss portion 208A is shown in FIG. 10) are erected on the upper surface of the projecting plate 208.

  A bush 209A is rotatably attached to the boss 208A with respect to the boss 208A. The bush 209A is prevented from coming off from the boss portion 208A by a screw 209C via a washer 209B.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper base 202 includes a base body 210 extending in the left-right direction and a semicircular portion 211 protruding forward from the base body 210. A guide groove 210A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the base body 210, and a rack member 212 is inserted in the guide groove 210A so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

  A rack tooth 212A is formed at the right end of the rack member 212, and a relay gear 213 meshes with the rack tooth 212A. The relay gear 213 is rotatably supported by the base body 210, and the relay gear 213 meshes with the output gear 214A of the motor 214. The motor 214 is driven by the rotating accessory control board 78.

  The motor 214 is supported by the base body 210 and rotates the output gear 214A. When the output gear 214A rotates forward and backward, the rack member 212 reciprocates in the left-right direction via the relay gear 213.

  The rack member 212 is provided with a guide piece 212B, and the guide piece 212B projects forward from the rack member 212. A long hole 212b extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the guide piece 212B. A bush 209A attached to a boss portion 208A located at the center among the three boss portions 208A formed on the upper surface of the protruding plate 208 is slidably fitted into the elongated hole 212b.

  The semicircular portion 211 is formed with a guide groove 211A that curves in the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, in other words, in the same direction as the direction along the arc surface 205A. The above-mentioned three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide groove 211A. The central bush 209A of the three bushes 209A is further fitted into the elongated hole 212b through the guide groove 211A.

  Accordingly, when the rack member 212 moves in the left-right direction, the center bush 209A moves along the guide groove 211A while moving in the longitudinal hole 212b in the front-rear direction, so that the eyeball member 205 moves in the left-right direction. Rotate.

  Engagement pieces 206B and 207B are formed on the upper parts of the left and right outer corner members 206 and 207, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11 to 13, guide grooves 210B and 210C are formed in the base body 210, and the guide grooves 210B and 210C extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. There is. Engagement pieces 206B and 207B are engaged with the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are guided by the guide grooves 210B and 210C and rotate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 14 to 16, guide grooves 204A and 204B are formed in the lower base 204, and the guide grooves 204A and 204B extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. is doing.

  A pair of bushes 215A and 215B are rotatably provided in the lower portion of the left outer corner eye member 206, and the bushes 215A and 215B are slidably fitted in the guide groove 204A. A pair of bushes 215C and 215D are rotatably provided below the right outer corner member 207, and the bushes 215C and 215D are slidably fitted in the guide groove 204B.

  As a result, the engaging pieces 206B, 207B are guided by the guide grooves 210B, 210C of the upper base 202, and the bushes 215A, 215B, 215C, 215D are guided by the guide grooves 204A, 204B of the lower base 204. The left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are stably movable in the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

  In FIGS. 7 and 8, a left outer corner member 216 and a right outer corner member 217 are fixed to the lower base 204. The left outer corner member 216 and the right outer corner member 217 are positioned in front of the movable left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207, respectively, and the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are located in a state where the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position. Covers a part of it from the front. The state in which the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position is a state in which the image 205a simulating the eyeball of the eyeball member 205 faces the front, as shown in FIGS. 8, 11, and 14.

  In a state where the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position, the left outer corner member 216 covers the left half of the left outer corner member 206. On the other hand, the right half of the left outer corner member 206 is not covered with the left outer corner member 216 and is visible from the front. The right outer corner member 217 covers the right half of the right outer corner member 207. On the other hand, the left half of the right outer corner member 207 is not covered with the right outer corner member 217 and is visible from the front.

  In FIG. 7 and FIG. 14, one end of the wire 218 is attached to the bush 215A of the left outer corner member 206, and the other end of the wire 218 is attached to one end of the coil spring 219. The other end of the coil spring 219 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 219 biases the left outer corner member 206 to the left, which is the other direction of the rotation of the eyeball member 205.

  A pulley 220 is provided between the coil spring 219 and the left outer corner of the eye member 206. The pulley 220 is in sliding contact with the wire 218, and the coil spring 219 is lateral to the one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction ( The wire 218 is bent so as to be located on the left side).

  One end of the wire 221 is attached to the bush 215C of the right outer corner member 207, and the other end of the wire 221 is attached to one end of the coil spring 222. The other end of the coil spring 222 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 222 urges the right outer corner member 207 in the right direction, which is one direction in which the eyeball member 205 rotates.

  A pulley 223 is provided between the coil spring 222 and the right outer corner member 207. The pulley 223 slidably contacts the wire 221, and the coil spring 222 laterally extends from one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction ( The wire 221 is bent so as to be located on the right side).

  Here, the rotary accessory 200 is provided with an LED board (not shown) including a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and the LED board is provided behind the eyeball member 205. The eyeball member 205 is illuminated from the rear by the LED, and the light illuminated on the eyeball member 205 is emitted to the front of the pachi-slot 1 through the lens 199.

  In rotating accessory 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, when output gear 214A is rotated counterclockwise by motor 214 from the state where eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position, relay gear 213 The rack member 212 moves to the right. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the elongated hole 212b is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  Since the three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 211A formed in the semicircular portion 211, when the central bush 209A is pressed to the right by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 It rotates to the right along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  The guide groove 211A is curved in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, and the three bushes 209A move rightward along the curved guide groove 211A. The central bush 209A is slidably fitted in the elongated hole 212b of the guide piece 212B of the rack member 212, and the elongated hole 212b extends along the front-rear direction of the pachi-slot 1, so that When the bush 209A moves rightward along the guide groove 211A, the center bush 209A slides forward and backward along the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 smoothly rotates along the guide groove 211A. ..

  When the eyeball member 205 moves to the right, the engagement projection 206A of the left outer corner eye member 206 engages with the engagement projection 205B formed at one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction (FIGS. 12 and 13). ), The left outer corner of the eye member 206 is movable in the right direction together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping with one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction behind the eyeball member 205.

  When the left outer corner member 206 moves to the right, the wire 218 pulls the coil spring 219 as shown in FIG. 16 from the moment when the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A (state of FIG. 15). The coil spring 219 extends and biases the left outer corner member 206 to the left.

  Since the engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye corner member 206 is located inward of the engagement protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205, the left eye corner member 206 moves rightward together with the eyeball member 205. Even if it moves, the left outer corner member 206 is not pulled back to the left by the coil spring 219. In this way, the eyeball member 205 moves to the right. 9, 13, and 14 show a state in which the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum movement position in the right direction.

  When the motor 214 rotates the output gear 214A in the clockwise direction from the state where the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum rightward movement position, the rack member 212 moves leftward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward toward the neutral position, the left outer corner eye member 206 is pulled by the coil spring 219, and thereby moves leftward together with the eyeball member 205. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum movement position in the right direction to the neutral position, the left outer corner of the eye member 206 returns to the initial position. The state in which the eyeball member 205 moves from the right direction toward the neutral position is shown in the order of FIG. 13 (FIG. 16), FIG. 12 (FIG. 15), and FIG. 11 (FIG. 14).

  When the motor 214 rotates the output gear 214A in the clockwise direction from the state where the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position, the rack member 212 moves leftward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the elongated hole 212b is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  When the three bushes 209A move leftward along the guide groove 211A, the central bush 209A slides in the front-rear direction along the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 smoothly moves along the guide groove 211A. Rotate.

  Further, when the eyeball member 205 moves leftward, the engagement projection 207A of the right outer corner eye member 207 engages with the engagement projection 205C formed at the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction, so that the eyeball member 205 At the rear of 205, the right outer corner member 207 is movable leftward together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping with the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction.

  When the right outer corner member 207 moves leftward, the wire 221 pulls the coil spring 222, whereby the coil spring 222 extends and biases the right outer corner member 207 to the right side. Since the engaging protrusion 207A of the right eye corner member 207 is located inward of the engaging protrusion 205C of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205, the right eye corner member 207 moves leftward together with the eyeball member 205. Even if it moves, the right outer corner member 207 is not pulled back to the right by the coil spring 222. In this way, the eyeball member 205 moves leftward.

  When the output gear 214A is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum leftward movement position, the rack member 212 moves rightward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward toward the neutral position, the right eye outer corner member 207 is pulled by the coil spring 219 and moves rightward together with the eyeball member 205. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum leftward movement position to the neutral position, the right outer corner member 207 returns to the initial position.

  In this way, the eyeball member 205 rotates between the right direction and the left direction after passing through the neutral position, so that it is possible to perform an effect as if the eyeball moves in the left and right directions.

[Main side game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, a game state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of a bonus winning / actuation, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 17, the main control circuit 91 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (BB) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is the bonus winning state and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state is Indicates that the bonus is operating.

  Further, the main control circuit 91 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations relating to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. It should be noted that the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of a combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination has a low probability, and the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state are internal winning combinations relating to the replay. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. The RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which there is a high probability that a winning combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination, and is the most advantageous gaming state among the bonus non-winning states.

  The main control circuit 91 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state, which are distinguished based on whether or not a bonus is won / actuated, and an RT0 game which is distinguished based on the type of an internal winning combination related to replay and its winning probability. From the state to the RT5 gaming state, the gaming state on the main side in the pachi-slot 1 is managed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91, as a gaming state in the pachi-slot 1, RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state, RT4 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, RT5 gaming state of flag state, RT0 gaming state of bonus state, RT2 gaming state of bonus state, RT4 gaming state of bonus state, and RB gaming state of bonus state Manages 10 types of states.

  Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when the data 1 is stored in the bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4, it means that the bonus is won. Further, the presence or absence of bonus operation and the RT game state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 3 and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area, the bonus (BB game state) is operating and the RT4 game state is set.

  RT0 gaming state of bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of all bits of gaming state flag storing area is 0) Is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, and the inter-flag state There is a possibility of shifting to the RT5 gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of the symbols related to (1) the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state The RT1 game state is entered. It should be noted that the bell spill is a combination of symbols that is displayed when the pressing order bell, which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell. In addition, the RT1 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is given to the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order lip when the pushing order lip described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (2) When a combination of symbols relating to the RT4 shift lip is displayed, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is shifted. The RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given to the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order lip when the pushing order lip to be described later is determined as the internal winning combination, or will be described later. This is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_chance rep 2” or “F_skip chance rep 2” is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (3) When a combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition lip is displayed, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is entered. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip”, which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (5) when the winning combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. The combination relating to BB is any one of “F_black-black-black”, “F_red-red-red-red”, “F_white-white-white”, “F_red-red-white”, and “F_white-white-red” described later. These winning combinations related to BB are carried over as internal winning combinations until a combination of corresponding symbols is displayed when determined as an internal winning combination (that is, until the operation of BB starts), that is, so-called carryover. It is a role.

  Then, the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 0 of the gaming state flag storing area is data. 1) is one of the basic game states in the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state, (4) when the fixed number of games (five games in this embodiment) has elapsed, the RT0 game of the bonus non-winning state Transition to the state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the winning combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state of the flag state.

  In addition, the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 1 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a game state in which there is a possibility of shifting after the operation of the BB is completed. In this embodiment, at the end of the bonus, the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained and the bonus non-winning state is entered. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is shifted when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, from the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state, (1) when the combination of symbols related to the bell spill is displayed, the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state Move to. In addition, in the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the winning combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 2 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a gaming state in which there is a high probability that a winning combination related to replay will be determined as an internal winning combination, as compared to the RT0 gaming state, which is the basic gaming state of the pachi-slot 1. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, (4) when the fixed number of games (five games in this embodiment) has elapsed, the RT0 game of the bonus non-winning state Transition to the state. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the winning combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 3 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is an advantageous state in which a winning combination is most likely to be determined as an internal winning combination and a game can be played without reducing medals. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state of the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of the symbols related to (1) the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state The RT1 game state is entered. In addition, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  In addition, the RT5 gaming state between the flags (the data of any one of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 1 is 1 and the bit 4 of the gaming state flag storing area is The data 1) is a so-called BB flag in which a winning combination related to BB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and a game that stays until a combination of symbols according to the BB carried over as an internal winning combination is displayed. It is in a state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT5 gaming state between the flags, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT5 gaming state between the flags, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB carried over is displayed, and when the BB operates, RT0 in the bonus state Move to the gaming state.

  RT0 game state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1), It is a game state in which the player stays first when the BB operates. During the bonus state, the RT0 game state of the bonus state is started and the game state is shifted to another game state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the state shifts to the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus ends, RT game state is maintained). The operation of the BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

  In addition, in the bonus state RT0 gaming state, when the winning combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus state RT4 gaming state is entered. The combination of JACIN is one of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, which will be described later, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a high probability that the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination (about 52%), so basically the operation of the BB is performed. Before the end, the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, and the bonus-state RT4 gaming state is entered. These winning combinations relating to JACIN are determined as internal winning combinations until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (that is, until the operation of RB is started), only as an internal winning combination during the bonus state. It is a so-called carryover role that is carried over.

  In addition, the RT4 game state of the bonus state (the data of bits 1 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and the data of bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a role related to JACIN. It is between the so-called RB flags in the bonus state, which is carried over as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RB gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state shifts (before and after the bonus ends, RT game state is maintained). Further, in the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state, (8) the combination of symbols according to the carried over JACIN is displayed, and when the RB operates, the RB gaming state of the bonus state is entered.

  Also, the RB game state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 5 and bit 6 of the gaming state flag storing area) The data 1) is a gaming state that shifts when the operation of the RB starts during the bonus state. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, in the RB game state of the bonus state, there is a high probability that “out” is determined as an internal winning combination (about 65%), which is basically a disadvantageous state. In the pachi-slot 1 of the form, during the bonus state, the combination of symbols according to the carried over JACIN is not displayed and the RT4 game state of the bonus state is maintained and the game is played.

  As shown in FIG. 17, from the RB gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RB gaming state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the bonus non-winning state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. In addition, in the RB game state of the bonus state, when the operation of (9) RB is completed, it shifts to the RT2 game state of the bonus state. The operation of the RB is that a combination of symbols other than “out” is displayed eight times in the RB game state of the bonus state (eight times of winnings), and twelve games are performed in the RB game state of the bonus state. Or the operation of BB ends, the operation ends.

  In addition, RT2 game state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 1 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area) The data 1) is a gaming state that is shifted after the bonus RB gaming state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state. Specifically, in the RT2 game state of the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state shifts (the RT game state is maintained before and after the bonus ends). In addition, in the bonus RT2 game state, when the winning combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus RT4 game state is entered. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT control means, and based on the determined internal winning combination, the RT gaming state between the RT0 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state according to each transition condition. To move.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 represents, by data, the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence relationship between the 21 symbol positions "0" to "20" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are "white 7", "red 7", "BAR", "lip 1", "lip 2", "lip 3", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "watermelon" and " Includes "bell".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. In the order of movement in the rotational directions of 3C and 3R, the correspondence relationship is assigned in which the symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, it is possible to specify the type of symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 19, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 19 represents codes for specifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment are, as described above, “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, There are 10 types of "cherry 2", "watermelon" and "bell".

  In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "red 7" symbol (symbol code 2). For the "BAR" symbol (symbol code 3), "00000011" is assigned as data.

  Similarly, for each of the symbols "Rip 1", "Rip 2", "Rip 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell" (symbol codes 4 to 10), “0000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege (combination), data to be stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a combination of the symbol is displayed. Stipulates the corresponding relationship with the privilege (the number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the winning line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table, the winning is achieved. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of a replay, and operation of a bonus game. If the symbol combination displayed along the pay line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, the so-called “out” occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the "off" is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination of "off" is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the "combination" item may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "combination".

  The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combinations displayed along the pay line. Specifically, in the data column, "storage area (data for designating a display combination storage area (see FIG. 61) described later)" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and the storage area “Data (data for designating a bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in 1-byte data) to be stored” is defined. In the present embodiment, by using 45 1-byte storage areas, the combination of each symbol is determined. For example, “R_RT transition eye A_01” shown in FIG. 20 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storing area 1.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the pay line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. A combination name according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols forming the combination is defined in each combination.

  The payout number defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 30, when the combination “C_CD bell” is displayed, 10 medals will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, a combination of many symbols shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is classified into a plurality of types according to their roles. The combination type column in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a combination of a large number of symbols is classified into six types of “RT transition eye”, “BB”, “JACIN”, “replay”, “RT transition replay”, and “winning prize”.

  The role type “RT transition eye” is a combination (combination) of symbols in which the transition of the RT game state is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye F_08” shown in FIG. .. These "RT transition eyes" are a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is made in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell, and are the "bell spilled eyes" described above. That is, if the press order bell is determined as the internal winning combination and the press order is incorrect, there is a possibility that one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the combination type “RT transition eye” is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “RT transition eye” is displayed, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT1 gaming state.

  The combination type “BB” is a combination (combination) of symbols in which the operation of BB is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_BB1” to “C_BB5_02” shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type “BB” is displayed, the operation of BB is started and the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

  The combination type “JACIN” is a combination (combination) of symbols in which the RB is operated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_JACIN1” to “C_JACIN3” shown in FIG. When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination type “JACIN” is displayed, the operation of the RB is started, and after the operation of the RB is completed, the RT2 game state is entered.

  The role type “re-game” is a combination of symbols in which the re-game is operated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CU white” to “C_KY lip — 09” shown in FIG. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “replay” is displayed, the replay operation is performed. If a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination type “replay” is displayed, the transition to the RT game state is not performed.

  The role type “RT transition re-game” is a combination of symbols (combination) in which the transition of the RT game state may be performed together with the operation of the re-game when displayed, and the “C_CU Lip” shown in FIGS. 22 to 28. "_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" correspond to this. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “RT transition re-game” is displayed, the re-game is operated, and there is a possibility of shifting to various RT game states depending on the symbol combination.

  For example, when “C_CU REP_01” to “C_CU REP_03” shown in FIG. 22 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. These "C_CU Lip_01" to "C_CU Lip_03" are combinations of symbols that may be displayed when an incorrect answer is made in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order Lip described above, and the "RT1" described above. "Transition Lip". That is, when the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination and the push order is incorrect, any one of “C_CU lip_01” to “C_CU lip_03” is displayed.

  Further, when "C_C rep 01" to "C_bell FKC_12" shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT4 gaming state. These "C_C lip 01" to "C_bell FKC_12" are the above-mentioned "RT4 transition lip". More specifically, when the above-mentioned push order lip is determined as an internal winning combination and the push order is correct, one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” is displayed. Further, when the above-mentioned “F_chance lip 2” or “F_slip chance lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of “C_C lip 01” to “C_bell FKC_12” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. It will be.

  Further, when "C_CD Cherip A_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" shown in FIGS. 25 to 28 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 gaming state. These "C_CD cherip A_01" to "C_sui FKF_18" are the above-mentioned "RT3 transition lip". More specifically, when "F_Slip Chance Lip 1" or "F_Cherry Lip" described above is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of "C_CD Cherip A_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" is irrespective of the pressing order. Will be displayed.

  The winning combination "winning prize" is a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out when displayed, and corresponds to "C_CD watermelon" to "C_B bell BB_04" shown in FIGS. 29 to 32. When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "winning" is displayed, the number of medals specified in the payout number column of the symbol combination table is paid out. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination "winning" is displayed, the RT game state is not changed.

  “C_CD bell” shown in FIG. 30 is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell described above. Further, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination “winning”, the symbol combination of the payout number “3” is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell. It is a possible combination of symbols. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell, the combination of symbols of the payout number "3" among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the winning combination "winning", or the winning combination "RT transition" A combination of symbols corresponding to "eyes" will be displayed. In Pachi-slot 1, since there are 6 possible pressing orders for the stopping operation, the symbol combination displayed in the case of incorrect answers in the pressing order is set arbitrarily from the 5 incorrect pressing orders. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG. 37, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines lottery value information about the data pointer corresponding to the winning combination. In the RT0 gaming state of the above bonus non-winning state, the internal winning combination is determined by using the lottery value defined in the “RT0” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state to the bonus non-winning state. In the RT4 gaming state of the winning state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery values defined in the "RT1" to "RT4" columns of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT5 gaming state between the flags, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “RT5” column of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state, the internal winning combination is determined by using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RT0)” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the RT4 gaming state or the bonus state of the bonus state. In the RT2 gaming state of the state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB in (RT4)” or “BB in (RT2)” column of the internal lottery table, and the RB gaming state in the bonus state Then, the internal lottery combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RB)” column of the internal lottery table.

  The internal lottery table basically changes the type and winning probability of a replay related to an internal winning combination determined as an internal winning combination according to the type of RT gaming state, and determines whether or not a bonus (BB or RB) is activated. The type of winning combination (other than replay and carryover combination) determined as an internal winning combination and the winning probability change.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is data used for determining the storage area type and 1-byte data. As the data pointer, a small win / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of a plurality of winning numbers.

  In the present embodiment, random number values for lottery extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values according to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative. An internal lottery is carried out by making a determination (whether a so-called "carry" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the Dake pointer) to which this is assigned is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)”.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
38 to 56 are comparative tables showing a correspondence relationship with a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the pay line in each internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. In the winning combination, the correspondence table is omitted for the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed on the pay line (for example, in the winning combination “F_black-black-black” shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 39 and the subsequent figures. Since the combination of symbols shown in (1) cannot be displayed, the correspondence table is not shown).

  With reference to FIG. 38, for example, when the winning combination "F_black black black" is the internal winning combination, the symbol combination of the combination name "C_BB1" can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. With reference to FIG. 21, this combination name “C_BB1” is a combination of symbols in which “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed along the pay line. The correspondence table shown in the figure does not define the case where the winning combination is “out”, but this is a combination of all the symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 32. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

  In the pachi-slot 1, the main control circuit 91 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 38 to 56 are obtained. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a symbol combination (combination) can be displayed. The correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 56 list all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but the main control circuit 91 stops the operation. Since the control differs not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current gaming state, even a combination of symbols marked with a circle corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Outline of the winning role>
This point will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIGS. 57 and 58. As shown in FIG. 57, when “out” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of all the symbol combinations defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is not permitted. In addition, in the RT4 gaming state in which there is a high probability that the winning combination of the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability that the “outfall” is determined as the internal winning combination decreases as the winning probability of the winning combination of the replay increases. Therefore, in the following, there is a case where the “out” in the RT4 gaming state is used as a rare combination (handled as a so-called “pure out”).

  In addition, when any one of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIG. 38 is taken. Display of combinations of related symbols is permitted. In addition, when any of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above, The gaming state becomes the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  Further, when either "F_maintenance rep 1" or "F_maintenance rep 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is permitted. In addition, in "F_maintenance rep 1" and "F_maintenance rep 2", even if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the RT game state is not changed.

  In addition, "F_123 lip" to "F_2nd lip" are the above-mentioned push order lip, and when any of these push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. Display of a combination of symbols that the user has is permitted. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order lip, the RT4 transition lip (FIG. 22 to FIG. 22) among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. Display of the symbol combination corresponding to (see FIG. 24) is permitted, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the above-mentioned RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) of the symbol combinations having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. ) Is allowed to display a combination of symbols.

  The name of the winning combination as a push order lip is determined based on the correct push order. For example, “1” in the name “F_123 Lip” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “right”. ". Then, “123” indicates the correct pressing order, and in the case of “F_123 lip”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. It means that the answer is correct when the value is, and the answer is incorrect when the pressing order is other than that. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 lip”, the correct answer is obtained when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, and in the case of other pressing order It is shown to be incorrect. In addition, “F — 2nd lip” indicates that the correct answer is given when the first stop operation is “medium”, and the incorrect answer is given when the pushing order is other than that.

  Returning to FIG. 57, "F_123 upper 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 set" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations having stop control that differs according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_123 upper stage 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 set" are the above-mentioned pressing order lip, and when the pressing order is correct, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 are shown. Display of the symbol combination corresponding to the above-described RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) among the symbol combinations having “” is permitted, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the symbol combination corresponding to the above-described RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) of the symbol combinations that the user has is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper 7 ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 set” are “F_123 upper 7 ten” among the symbol combinations of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white_02” shown in FIG. ~ "F_2nd cross 7 assortment" is allowed to be displayed in the combination of symbols. Here, the symbol combinations of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02" are pseudo lines other than the winning line among the lines that linearly connect the upper, middle and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is a combination of symbols in which three or two "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed may be referred to as "7 set lip", and also "white 7" symbol or "red 7" The combination of the symbols in which two of the symbols are displayed may be referred to as "7-inspired lip". Of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02", the combination of symbols without "FK (fake)" attached to the combination name is "7 sets of lip", and the combination name is "FK (fake)" The combination of symbols marked with is "7-inspired lip". The line connecting the upper, middle and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line is a top line connecting the upper stages, a center line connecting the middle stages, a bottom line connecting the lower stages, a crossdown line connecting to the lower right, and There are 5 types of cross-up lines that connect to the right, but since the winning line is a cross-down line, "7 matching rep" or "7 fluttering rep" are 4 pseudo lines other than the cross-down line. 3 or 2 of either the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol will be displayed along any of the above.

  With reference to the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 39, in the bonus state, the display of “7 twisting lip” is permitted for “F_123 upper row 7 ten” and “F_132 lower row 7 ten”. In addition, in the bonus state, the display of “7-set Lip” is permitted for “F_312 upper 7 sets” to “F_2nd cross 7 set”.

  Further, "F_J1 upper stage 7 rep", "F_J1 lower stage 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are not only internal winning combinations, but also winning combinations in which stop control is different depending on a game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are the RT4 transition lips described above regardless of the pressing order (see FIGS. 22 to 24). ) Is allowed to display a combination of symbols. In addition, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state, so in the bonus non-winning state , "F_J1 upper stage 7 rep", "F_J1 lower stage 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J1 upper stage 7 rep”, “F_J1 lower stage 7 rep” and “F_J1 cross 7 rep” has different stop control depending on the type of the winning combination carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN1" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" or "F_J1 cross 7 rep" and "F_JACIN1". "And two are determined as internal winning combinations)", "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are "7 complete rep" and other than the cross down line Three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols will be displayed along any of the four pseudo lines of.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip”). If either "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is determined as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are "normal in bonus". "Rip", and a combination of symbols other than "7 Alignment Lip" among the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is displayed.

  The state in which “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC1 flags”, and similarly, the state in which “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination is “between JAC2 flags”, The state in which “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC3 flags”.

  Further, "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep" are not only internal winning combinations, but also winning combinations whose stop control is different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, since "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep" are determined as the internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, "F_J1 upper 7 rep" in the bonus non-winning state, When "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" and "F_J1 cross 7 rep" are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” differs depending on the type of winning combination related to JACIN carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN2" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, "F_J1 upper tier 7 rep", "F_J1 lower tier 7 rep" or "F_J1 cross 7 rep" and "F_JACIN2". 2) is determined as an internal winning combination), “F_J2 chance rep 1” to “F_J2 cherry rep” are “chance rep” and have symbols corresponding to those shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. The display of the symbol combination of any one of the combinations of “C_B lip 01” to “C_sui FKF_18” is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, any one of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” and “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3”). When two of the heels are determined as the internal winning combination), “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are “normal lip during bonus” and have the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Of the combinations of symbols, the symbol combinations other than "chance lip" are displayed.

  Further, "F_J3 chance rep 1" to "F_J3 cherry rep" are not only internal winning combinations, but also winning combinations with stop control different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols according to the RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, since "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are determined as the internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, "F_J3 chance lip 1" -in the bonus non-winning state. When "F_J3 Cherry Rep" is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J3 chance rep 1” to “F_J3 cherry rep” are “chance rep” regardless of the type of winning combination related to JACIN carried over as an internal winning combination, and are shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Display of any symbol combination of “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among the symbol combinations having a correspondence relationship is permitted.

  When any of “F_chance rip 1” to “F_common bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 56 is permitted. Features such as the transition of the RT game state triggered by "F_chance rep 1" to "F_common bell" are as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 58, “F_123 bell A” to “F_321 bell D” are basically the above-described push order bells, and any of these push order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In that case, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted. More specifically, when the correct answer is given in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell, "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)" of the symbol combinations having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. The display of a combination of symbols according to is permitted. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect answers in the pressing order determined for each type of pressing order bell, the pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned bell spilled eye (see FIG. 20) among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. Or the combination of symbols with the payout number “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 30 to 32) is permitted.

  The name of the winning combination as the push order bell is determined based on the correct push order. For example, “1” in the name “F_123 Bell A” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”. "Right". Then, “123” indicates the correct pressing order, and in the case of “F_123 Bell A”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. It means that the correct answer is given when it is ", and the incorrect answer is given when the pushing order is other than that." Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Bell A”, the correct answer is obtained when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, and the other pressing order is the same. In some cases, it is incorrect.

  Also, among the pressing order bells, “F_123 bell C”, “F_123 bell D”, “F_132 bell C”, “F_132 bell D”, “F_213 bell C”, “F_213 bell D”, “F_231 bell C”, “F_231 bell D”, and “F_312 bell”. “C”, “F_312 bell D”, “F_321 bell C”, and “F_321 bell D” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control is different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, between the non-flag (RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state ~ RT4 gaming state) is the above-mentioned pushing order bell, and when the answer is correct in the pushing order, the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. Of the combinations of symbols, the display of the symbol combinations corresponding to the “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)” is permitted, and when the pressing order is incorrect, among the symbol combinations having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. It is permitted to display a combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned bell spill (see FIG. 20), or a combination of symbols having a payout number of “3” (see FIGS. 30 to 32) in the symbol combination table.

  On the other hand, in the state between flags (RT5 game state of the state between flags), "F_123 bell C" "F_123 bell D" "F_132 bell C" "F_132 bell D" "F_213 bell C" "F_213 bell D" "F_231 bell D" “C” “F_231 bell D” “F_312 bell C” “F_312 bell D” “F_321 bell C” and “F_321 bell D” are combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. Display of a combination of symbols according to "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)" is permitted.

  Further, when any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 38 is permitted. When any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” determined as the internal winning combination have a combination of corresponding symbols. Until it is displayed (only during the bonus state), it will be carried over as an internal winning combination.

  Further, when either “F_RB combination A” or “F_RB combination B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
59 to 65 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 59 is configured by 45 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each storage area of these internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the internal winning combination (data indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) is stored. In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 corresponds to “C_BB1” indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped when the internal winning combination is “F_black black black”. ..

<Carry-over combination storage area>
The internal carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 60 is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, which is composed of two internal storage areas 1 and 2. In the carryover combination storing area, data relating to the carryover combination is stored.

  For example, by storing “1” in bit 2 of the carryover combination storing area 1, it is possible to determine that the combination name “C_BB1” is in a winning state of “F_black-black-black” which can be stopped. The state in which "1" is stored in bit 2 of the carryover combination storing area 1 is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the combination name "C_BB1" is displayed on the pay line.

  That is, when "F_black-black-black" is won, the bit 2 in the carryover combination storing area 1 is set to "2" in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the pay line as a display combination. The state in which "1" is stored is retained. From the unit game that wins the bonus to the unit game that wins the prize, maintaining the state where "1" is stored in bit 2 is called so-called "carryover". Also, "F_black-black-black", "F_red-red-red", "F_white-white-white", "F_red-red-white", "F_white-white-red", "F_JACIN1" corresponding to the data (combination of patterns) stored in the carryover combination storage area. "F_JACIN2" and "F_JACIN3" are referred to as "Carryover hand".

  When the player performs a stop operation and each of the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storing area is initialized, but the carryover combination storing area is not initialized. By doing so, the state of "carry-over" can be maintained.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area shown in FIG. 61 is configured by 45 storage areas of the display combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the display combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the display combination storage areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is stored. The value of the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the display combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storing area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storing area 1 correspond to “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye C_01”, respectively.

<Game status flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 62 stores a flag for identifying the game state managed by the main control circuit 91, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bits 0 to 6 of the gaming status flag storage area are set to "RT1 gaming status", "RT2 gaming status", "RT3 gaming status", "RT4 gaming status", "RT5 gaming status", "BB gaming status", and "RB gaming status", respectively. It corresponds.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 63 has a size of 1 byte. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas showing stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, that is, valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused and "0" is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, the valid stop button means that the stop operation can be detected. Further, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels that are rotating at a constant speed, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 64 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. The pressing order storage area has a size of 1 byte, bits 0 to 5 are used, bits 6 and 7 are unused, and "0" is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, if the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 1, and if the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit2. Is stored (ON), "1" is stored (ON) in bit 3 in the case of "middle → right → left", and "1" is stored in bit 4 in the case of "right → left → middle" (ON), and if “right → middle → left”, “1” is stored (on) in bit 5.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 65 is configured similarly to the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating a combination of symbols that may be displayed on the spinning reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all combinations of symbols may be displayed, so "1" is stored in all the corresponding bits of the symbol code storage area. It After that, when the left reel 3L is stopped (the reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the symbol combination that cannot be displayed due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to "0".

[Sub-game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a game state controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 manages the game state based on whether or not to notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 66, the sub-control circuit 101 distinguishes a normal game state, an ART game state, and a bonus state. Here, the general game state is basically a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is basically a game state that is advantageous to the player, and the ART game state is a game state. This is the most advantageous game state for the player. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player will play the game so as to shift from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state depending on the situation) to the most advantageous ART game state.

  The general gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state on the ART lottery on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 66, the normal gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state and CZ are gaming states with different transition probabilities to the ART gaming state, the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and CZ are Compared with the normal game state, the game state has a high probability of transition to the ART game state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state on the ART lottery on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state, CZ, high-probability gaming state, and bonus state.

  Specifically, in the normal game state, the transfer lottery (A) to ART and CZ is performed, and in this transfer lottery, if the transition to (A1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the normal game state. The game state is transferred from to the ART game state. In addition, in this transfer lottery, when the transfer to (A2) CZ is won, the sub control circuit 101 transfers the game state from the normal game state to the CZ. The details of the transfer lottery (A) during the normal game state will be described later, but in the normal game state, the transition to the ART and CZ is performed at two timings, one when the reel starts rotating and the other when the reel stops during one game. The lottery (A) is performed.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, a transition lottery (B) to the high-probability gaming state is also performed. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the main side gaming state is controlled to shift to the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state, the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state shifts to the high-probability gaming state (B) Is done. If this transfer lottery (B) is won, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the high-probability game state. The details of the transition lottery (B) in the normal game state will be described later, but in this transition lottery, the role related to the replay in the bonus non-winning RT4 game state which is the sub-side normal game state is an internal winning combination. Transfer lottery (B) is performed based on the determined number of times.

  Further, in the normal game state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB carried over is displayed, and when the BB operates, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the bonus state. Since the transition to the bonus state is common to the main side and the sub side, detailed description thereof will be omitted below.

  Subsequently, CZ is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state on the sub side ART lottery. CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which there is a high probability of shifting to the ART gaming state, and 30 games are continued at the maximum. The CZ is a so-called completion type chance zone, and when the maximum CZ of 30 games continues, the ART transition is confirmed. On the other hand, during the CZ, the transfer lottery to the ART is performed, and when the transfer lottery is “maintained”, the CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is “maintained”, if the transition lottery is won, the transition to the ART is performed, but it is more advantageous when the CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of shifting to the ART gaming state, during the CZ, basically, the game is played without receiving the transition lottery, and when the transition lottery is performed, the transition lottery is set to "invalid". By playing the game as described above, it is desired to continue 30 games without ending the CZ. The “maintenance / invalidity” of the transfer lottery during CZ will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal game state, the ART game state, and the bonus state. Specifically, when (C1) is won in the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed during the CZ, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from CZ to the ART game state, and the transition lottery ( C2) When the winning is not won, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequently, the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side (see FIG. 17), and is a non-winning gaming state in the ART lottery on the sub side, and It is a gaming state that is won in the lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability gaming state during the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the high probability game state to the normal game state, the ART game state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the high-probability game state, the transition lottery (D) to the ART is performed, and in this transition lottery, if the transition to (D1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the high-probability game state. The game state is transferred from to the ART game state. The details of the transfer lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described later, but basically, like the transfer lottery (A) during the normal game state, at the start of reel rotation during one game and the reels. The lottery (D) for shifting to ART is performed at two timings when stopped. The transition lottery (D) in the high-probability game state has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART than the transition lottery (A) in the normal game state.

  Further, the high-probability game state is a game state corresponding to the RT4 game state (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and in the control on the main side, (E) RT4 game state is shifted to RT1 game state. When the control is performed, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state).

  Here, as described above, the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side is the correct answer to the push order lip in the RT0 game state of the bonus non-winning state of the main side (normal game state of the sub side). It is a game state to be transferred. As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game state, which is the most basic game state (= disadvantageous to the player), when the correct answer is given to the push-order lip, the high-probability game state is entered and the ART is performed. Make the transition of. In other words, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, if the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, a penalty such as not performing the ART lottery is given. Instead, it puts it in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state that has not been won in the ART lottery can be set as the chance of transition to the ART gaming state, and the bonus non-attached bonus ART is not attached. It is possible to enhance the interest of the RT4 gaming state in the winning state.

  Also, for the player, if the correct answer is given in the normal game state in the order of pushing, there is a possibility of shifting to the high-probability game state, which is a transition chance section to the ART game state, so a strategy for the stop operation in the normal game state And the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. That is, in terms of game play in which a penalty section is a game state that is accidentally shifted by a player's stop operation, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed on the left reel so as not to receive a penalty). Must be done). In this regard, like the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state by performing the lottery for shifting to the ART without imposing a penalty, and the normal game state. Not only the playability in the middle but also the operability can be improved.

  By the way, when the game state accidentally shifted by the stop operation is set as the transition chance section to the ART game state instead of the penalty section, the profit on the player side and the profit on the game shop side are prevented from giving an excessive profit to the player. It is necessary to adjust the balance with. There are many possible methods for adjusting the balance, and for example, there is an adjustment method in which it is easier to win the transfer lottery as compared to the normal game state, while setting a transition opportunity section to the ART game state. With the method, the meaning of the transition opportunity section is weakened. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, an RT1 game state in a fixed number of bonus non-winning states that does not shift to the RT4 game state in the bonus non-winning state is provided. I am trying. By providing the RT1 game state in the bonus non-winning state of such a fixed number of games, it is possible to adjust the frequency of accidental transition by the stop operation, and as a result, the profit of the player side and the profit of the game store side The balance can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the variables for adjusting the profit balance of both parties, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in game playability.

  Subsequently, the bonus state is a gaming state corresponding to one of the bonus states on the main side (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the bonus state to the normal game state (normal game state) and the ART game state. Specifically, in the transition lottery (F) to be performed during the bonus state, if (F1) is won, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the ART game state after the operation of BB is completed. When the (F2) non-win is selected for this transfer lottery, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the normal game state after the operation of the BB is completed. The details of the transfer lottery (F) in the bonus state will be described later, but in the bonus state, when the combination of the symbols of the above-mentioned “7 complete rep” can be displayed, the player wins ART, and BB. If a predetermined lottery is carried out at the end of the operation of, the ART will be won. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a specific effect state starting means, and when the transition to the ART is won in the transition lottery (A) during the normal game state (A1), the transition lottery during the CZ. When the transition to ART is won in (C) (C1), the transition lottery in the high probability game state (D) is successful in transition to ART (D1), and the transition lottery in bonus state (F) When the transition to ART is won (F1), the game state is shifted to the ART game state.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state that informs the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player, corresponds to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side (see FIG. 17), and is on the sub side. It is a game state in which the lottery is won. In the ART gaming state, for example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts (C_CD bell with a payout number of 10) is displayed so that the win push order bell is displayed. Notify the pressing order of correct answers. Further, in the ART gaming state, for example, when the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols for maintaining the RT4 gaming state in which the winning combination of the replay is highly likely to be determined as the internal winning combination (for example, In order to display the (RT4 transition rip), the winning push order lips are notified of the correct push order.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the teammate character and the enemy character battle (battle) during the ART game state and the teammate character wins, the ART game state is continued, and when the enemy character wins, End the gaming state. In order to provide such a game property, the ART game state is composed of an enemy determination ART and a battle ART as shown in FIG.

  The enemy determination ART is an ART game state during a period in which the type of the enemy character competing against the teammate character is determined. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that a battle ART and a bonus state may shift from the enemy determination ART. Specifically, in (G) enemy determination ART, when the enemy character is determined, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. The method of determining the enemy character during the enemy determination ART will be described later.

  In addition, the battle ART is an ART game state during a period in which the enemy character and the teammate character determined in the enemy determination ART compete with each other. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that the battle ART may shift to an enemy determination ART, a normal game state (normal game state), and a bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) during the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and the (H2) enemy character wins. Then, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the normal game state. The method of determining the outcome of the battle (H) during the battle ART will be described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state starting means, and the winning combination related to replay is internally won during the enemy determination ART and the battle ART, which is started based on the winning of the transfer lottery. The notification of the mode of the stop operation (for example, the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the RT4 shift lip) necessary to maintain the RT4 game state with a high probability of being determined as a role is started.

[Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning combination]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. Note that the "out-of-line" may be "out-of-line" only during the RT4 game state. In addition, the correspondence relationship between the main side and the sub side of the winning combination can be made different depending on the gaming state. In this respect, the correspondence shown in FIG. 67 shows the correspondence in the game state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG. 96.

[Outline of production performed on the liquid crystal display device 11]
FIG. 68 shows an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. In FIG. 68, the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into two regions, a first display region 111 and a second display region 112, for simplification of description, but in the actual pachi-slot 1, each region is mixed. It will be formed integrally.

  The first display area 111 is an area where main effects are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 68, a display example during the battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 68, an ally character and an enemy character compete with each other, and each attack / defense reduces their physical strength (HP) to produce a win / loss effect. .

  In the second display area 112, an apocalypse 113 that affects various lottery and the like performed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side is displayed. The apocalypse 113 is provided with five areas 113A, 113B, 113C, 113D, and 113E in which effect balls, which will be described later, are set. In the area 113A, effect balls that affect various lottery in this game are set, in the area 113B, effect balls that affect various lottery in the next game are set, and in the area 113C, two game destinations are set. In the game, effect balls that affect various lottery are set, in the area 113D, effect balls that affect various lottery in the game of three game destinations are set, and in the area 113E, various lottery in the game of four game destinations. A production ball that influences is set. That is, in the apocalypse 113, the effect balls that affect various lottery in the game for five times including the current game are set. As for the effect ball set in the apocalypse 113, the set area is updated as the game progresses. When the apocalypse 113 is activated, some effect ball (including a blank (empty)) is set, and when it is not operated, no effect ball is set.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may operate or may not operate, and is activated by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 113 operates in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, one of the lottery balls 1, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, and confirmed balls is displayed in the regions 113A to 113E as shown in FIG. The production ball of is set. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the apocalypse 113 affect the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the area 113A affect the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) in the game this time.

  The transfer lottery (A) and (D) described above is performed at two timings, one when the reel starts to rotate and the other when the reel stops during one game. Of these, for the transfer lottery (A) and (D) performed at the time of starting reel rotation (at the time of start), the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the area 113A become the lottery results regardless of the internal winning combination. Influence on. On the other hand, with respect to the transfer lottery (A) (D) performed when the reels are stopped, the lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls set in the area 113A have a combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped with "bell winning" or more. Affects the lottery result only in certain cases. It should be noted that the "bell prize" means that the combination of the symbols at the time of the correct press order is displayed on the push bell, or the combination of the symbols corresponding to the common bell is displayed, and the "bell prize" or more. Is a combination of symbols according to any of "Bell prize" or one of rare roles such as Chan Lip, strong cherry, weak cherry, final combination, watermelon, and pure out (see FIG. 67). Is.

  The lottery balls 1 to finalized balls have different effects on the transfer lottery (A) and (D). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the lottery ball 1 has a low winning probability of CZ or more (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a medium winning probability of CZ or more, and the lottery ball 3 has The winning probability of CZ or higher is a high probability, the winning of lottery balls 4 is the winning of CZ or more, and the winning of the confirmed balls is the ART winning.

  Subsequently, in CZ, the apocalypse 113 is always active. In the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 in the CZ, as shown in FIG. 57, one of the development balls and the avoidance balls is set, or a blank (empty) state in which no production balls are set is set. The development ball and the avoidance ball set in the apocalypse 113 in the CZ have an influence on the above-mentioned lottery (C) for the transition to the ART performed during the CZ. More specifically, the development ball and the avoidance ball set in the area 113A have an influence on the above-described transfer lottery (C) to ART in the game this time.

  Specifically, when the development ball is set in the area 113A and the push-order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-described transfer lottery (C) to ART is performed. Then, when the stop operation is performed in this game, if the stop operation is a correct stop operation in the pushing order defined for the winning push-order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) Becomes "invalid". On the other hand, when this stop operation is an incorrect stop operation in the pressing order determined for the winning push order bell, the lottery result of the transfer lottery (C) is “maintain”. As described above, the CZ is a complete run type CZ, and the CZ ends when the transfer lottery (C) performed in the middle stage before the complete run is “maintained”. Therefore, in the game in which the expansion balls are set in the area 113A, the player desires that the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (the transition lottery (C) itself is not performed), and the push order is temporarily determined. When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, it is desired that the answer is correct in the order of pressing (the transfer lottery (C) becomes invalid).

  In the above description, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is “maintained” means that in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the push order. This is synonymous with displaying a combination of symbols (bell-shaped eyes) displayed in that case. Therefore, the end condition of CZ can also be said that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is “maintained”, and in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the bell spill is displayed. It can also be said that.

  Further, in the above description, when the bell spilled pattern is displayed, the lottery result of the transfer lottery (C) is set to “invalid”, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery result of the transfer lottery (C) is set to "invalid" when the push order bell is pressed correctly, the player may be disadvantaged if he or she wins the transfer lottery (C). become. In this regard, by maintaining the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) without invalidating it at the time of pushing the push order bell correctly, it is possible to continue the CZ without giving a disadvantage to the player. Is preferred. In addition, when it is decided to “maintain” the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) at the time of pressing order bell correct answer of pressing order, the condition for ending CZ is to use the condition of incorrect answer in the pressing order bell pressing order. preferable. Thereby, the lottery result of the transfer lottery (C) can be “maintained” while continuing the CZ. Further, to “maintain” the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) while continuing the CZ means, for example, when the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is won, the right of the ART (the number of sets) is determined according to the lottery result. It means giving a number (one or more). In this way, by "maintaining" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) during the CZ, the transition lottery (first right granting lottery) performed in the middle of the CZ and the transition lottery (second It is possible to grant the right (the number of sets) of the ART granted by both of the right grant lottery, and as a result, the ART for the right can be executed after the CZ ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the right count management means and the advantageous state control means, and is given in both the transition lottery performed in the middle stage of CZ and the transition lottery performed when the CZ is completed. In addition to counting the total number of ART rights, after the completion of CZ, the total number of ARTs is executed.

  On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are effect balls that do not perform the above-described transfer lottery (C) to the ART even if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the player's point of view, in the game in which the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are set, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Subsequently, in the adversary ART, the apocalypse 113 is always activated. As shown in FIG. 68, one of the boss balls 1 to boss balls 8 and team balls is set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 in the enemy determination ART. The boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the enemy decision ART influence the lottery of the enemy decision performed during the enemy decision ART. More specifically, the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls set in the area 113A influence the lottery for determining the enemy in the current game.

  Specifically, when any of Boss ball 1 to Boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A, when the pushing order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, the set The boss according to the type of the boss ball being played is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss balls 1 to 8 are enemy characters having different characteristics, which will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when any of Boss ball 1 to Boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A, if an internal winning combination other than the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined and the enemy determination is performed. ART will continue. Further, when any of Boss ball 1 to Boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A, any one of pure defeat, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanrip (so-called rare role) is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, the opponent is not decided and the lottery of the allied balls is performed. In the situation where the lottery is won and ally balls are stocked, the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse are rewritten as ally balls.

  When a teammate ball is set in the area 113A during the enemy determination ART, lottery is performed to increase the physical strength (HP) of the teammate character based on the internal winning combination. If this lottery is won, the stamina of the teammate character increases, so that the expectation that the teammate character wins in the subsequent battle ART is increased.

  Subsequently, in the battle ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. In the battle ART, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, as shown in FIG. 68, any one of the effect balls, that is, a friendly ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball is set. The ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the apocalypse 113 in the battle ART affect the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the area 113A affect the competition in the game this time or thereafter.

  Specifically, when the pressing order bell or the common bell is determined as the internal winning combination when the team ball or the enemy ball is set in the area 113A, the character corresponding to the type of the set effect ball is set. Attack an opponent in the game. For example, when the teammate ball is set, the teammate character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the ally character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, when an ally ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if any one of the pure winch, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanrip (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination, The teammate character mounts an attack on an enemy character regardless of the type of effect balls that are set. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character is basically reduced more than when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, when the awakening ball is set in the area 113A, if it is determined as any one of the internal winning combinations of the push order bell, the common bell, the pure out, the watermelon, the weak cherry, the strong cherry, or the chanrip, the ally character is determined. While attacking the enemy character, allied balls are stocked. Then, when the ally ball is stocked, the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is rewritten as the ally ball by the stocked amount. As a result, the number of situations in which the teammate character makes an attack thereafter increases, and as a result, the degree of expectation that the teammate character wins in the battle ART increases.

[How to manage the production ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a method for managing effect balls in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1, the sub-control circuit 101 stores information on the effect balls set in the apocalypse 113 in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 103. As described above, since the effect balls are set in the apocalypse 113 in correspondence with the five areas 113A to 113E, five or more effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103. In this respect, in the present embodiment, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103 as shown in FIG.

  Of the six effect balls, the effect balls stored in the storage area “1” are set corresponding to the area 113A, and the effect balls stored in the storage area “2” are set corresponding to the area 113B. , The effect balls stored in the storage area “3” are set corresponding to the area 113C, the effect balls stored in the storage area “4” are set corresponding to the area 113D, and are stored in the storage area “5”. The effect balls to be played are set corresponding to the area 113E, and the effect balls stored in the storage area "6" are not set in the current game but are set to correspond to the area 113E in the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the time of FIG. 69 (a) (now game), the lottery balls 1, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, are set in the storage areas “1” to “5”, respectively. The balls are stored, and as a result, the lottery balls 1, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, and the confirmed balls are set in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, respectively. On the other hand, although the lottery balls 3 are stored in the storage area “6”, the lottery balls stored in the storage area “6” are not set in the apocalypse 113 at the time of FIG. 69 (a).

  After that, at the next game, the effect balls stored in the storage area are updated, and the effect balls set in the areas 113A to 113E slide one by one. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game, the storage areas "2" to "6" at the time point (previous game) of FIG. 69 (a). The effect balls that have been stored in “” are stored respectively, and new effect balls are randomly stored in the storage area “6” of the next game. As a result, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, the confirmed balls, and the effect balls 2 stored in the storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game are set. Will be done.

  The effect balls stored in the respective storage areas are set in the respective areas by the activation of the apocalypse 113 (that is, displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Here, as described above, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may be activated or non-activated, and thus is stored in the storage area in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. There is a case where the effect ball is not set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. On the other hand, in CZ and ART, since the apocalypse 113 always operates, the effect balls stored in the storage area are always set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 constitutes effect information storage means, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, the storage areas “1” to “6” corresponding to the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 are stored. Memorize the production ball. Further, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes a display means, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, a part of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (for example, storage areas “1” to “5”). Are displayed in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. In addition, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes effect information registering means, first effect information registering means, and second effect information registering means, and their respective game states (normal game state, high probability game state, CZ, ART game state). ), Lottery effect balls to be registered for a game for 6 games (a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead), and the effect balls determined by lottery (lottery balls 1 to 4, confirmed balls) , Boss balls 1 to 8, enemy balls, ally balls, etc.) are registered in the sub RAM 103 as effect information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse 113 are different between the normal game state and the high-probability game state, CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART. Therefore, the sub RAM 103 may be provided with a storage area corresponding to each state. In CZ, enemy determination ART, and battle ART, initial lottery of effect balls is performed at the start of each state, and all effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are cleared at the end of each state. Therefore, for the CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART, since the timings of using the storage areas do not overlap, a common storage area may be used.

  On the other hand, in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are maintained regardless of the activation / non-activation of the apocalypse 113. That is, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 immediately before the apocalypse 113 is deactivated is maintained even while the apocalypse 113 is deactivated, and is maintained in the sub RAM 103 when the apocalypse 113 is activated next time. A production ball is set in each area of the apocalypse 113. The storage areas corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are basically maintained during the game, but are cleared at a predetermined timing. The timing of clearing the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described later.

[ART and CZ lottery during normal gaming state and high probability gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70 to FIG. 87, details of the transfer lottery (A) (D) to ART and CZ performed in the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram of the transfer lottery (A) (D) performed in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, and FIGS. 71 to 87 are referred to during the transfer lottery (A) (D). Are various data tables. Various data tables are stored in the ROM cartridge board 76.

<Overview of transfer lottery (A) (D)>
Referring to FIG. 70, in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 91. .. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the ART / CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed. In this start transition lottery (A) (D), basically, the winning probability of ART or CZ is different depending on the gaming state, and the winning probability of ART or CZ is higher in the high-probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state. The probability is high. In the transition lottery (A) (D) at the start, as will be described later, not only the gaming state, but also the internal winning combination and the effect balls (lottery ball 1 to finalized ball) set in the area 113A Or, the winning probability of CZ is different.

  Further, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate the apocalypse. The winning probability of the apocalypse lottery differs depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, there are low mode, high mode and intensive mode (there are also states of short, middle and long, respectively) in the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Mode and High mode do not win to activate the apocalypse. In the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse operates when the promotion mode can be promoted to the concentrated mode.

  After that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the transfer lottery (A) (D) of ART and CZ at the time of reel stop is performed depending on whether or not the apocalypse is activated. Specifically, when the apocalypse is operating, based on the combination of the effect ball (lottery ball 1-confirmed ball) and the symbol of “bell winning” or more set in the area 113A, to ART and CZ. The transfer lottery (A) (D) is performed. In the transfer lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the effect balls set in the area 113A.

  On the other hand, when the apocalypse is not in operation, promotion lottery of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed. When the apocalypse is not operating, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are not set in the apocalypse (in other words, not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, this promotion lottery is performed for hidden information that does not appear in the table. As will be described later in detail, during the period during which the promotion lottery is performed, the rotating accessory 200 is driven, so that the player can know that the promotion lottery is being performed.

<Various data tables referred to in the transfer lottery (A) (D)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 87, the transfer lottery (A) (D) to the ART and CZ performed in the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be specifically described.

<Starting ART lottery table>
70 to 73 are diagrams showing the start-time ART lottery table referenced in the transition lottery (A) (D) at the start in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The start ART lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result for each of the current game state, the effect balls set in the area 113A, and the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side, the random number for effect extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 32767” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value according to each lottery result, The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “carry” has occurred).

  Referring to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, the probability of winning the CZ or ART is different according to the effect balls set in the area 113A during the normal game state, and the internal winning combination is also achieved. It can be seen that the probability of winning the CZ or ART varies depending on the situation. Further, comparing the start ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 and the start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high-probability game state, the player wins ART with a higher probability than in the normal game state, and In the high-probability game state, there is a probability that all the winning combinations will win the ART, but in the normal gaming state, only a part of the winning combinations wins the ART. If only a part of the winning combination is won, it means that only a part of the winning combination is drawn to the ART. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a part of the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Only in the case, the starting lottery (A) is performed, and in the high-probability game state, when a plurality of combinations including some of these combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, the starting lottery (A) is performed. become. Similarly, referring to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high-probability gaming state, although the CZ is not won, the probability of winning the ART is high.

<Mode change lottery table>
74 to 78 are mode transition lottery tables referred to in the transition lottery of the winning mode of the apocalypse operation in the normal game state and the high probability game state. The mode transition lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and the information of the lottery value for the winning mode of the transition destination for each internal winning combination. Whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating is determined by the apocalypse flag. When the apocalypse flag is "0", it means that the apocalypse is not operating, and when the apocalypse flag is "1", the apocalypse is operating. Means inside.

  As described above, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include the low mode, the high mode and the intensive mode, and the respective modes are provided with the states such as short, middle and long. The low mode, the high mode, and the intensive mode are the winning modes in which the expectation of the winning of the apocalypse lottery differs depending on whether or not the apocalypse is activated as described above. The short, middle, and long are states that define whether it is easy to shift to the more advantageous winning mode or the more unfavorable winning mode. Specifically, a short is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode, and a state in which it is most likely to shift to a more unfavorable winning mode, and a middle is difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode next. The state is the state in which it is easy to shift to the more unfavorable winning mode next, and the long is the state in which it is most likely to shift to the more advantageous winning mode and the most difficult to shift to the more unfavorable winning mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, when the apocalypse is inactive (Apocalypse flag 0), the winning mode basically goes up to the low mode, the high mode, and the intensive mode, and then goes up to the intensive mode once. And, it won't go down to low and high modes until the apocalypse works.

<Apocalypse activated lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an apocalypse actuation lottery table referred to in the apocalypse lottery during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The apocalypse operation lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently active, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and lottery value information regarding the operation of the apocalypse for each internal winning combination. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the guaranteed number of games to be added and subtracted as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the guaranteed number of times is added by the number corresponding to the case where “Apocalypse active_guaranteed 1 addition” to “Apocalypse active_guaranteed 5 addition” is won, and “Apocalypse active_guaranteed” If "subtract" is won, the guaranteed count is decremented by 1. When the guaranteed number of times becomes 0 as a result of the addition / subtraction, the apocalypse operation ends (the apocalypse flag changes from 1 to 0). If the guaranteed number of times is increased by 1 or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1 and the apocalypse operates.

  Further, in the apocalypse actuation lottery table, “no apocalypse actuation” means non-winning of the apocalypse lottery, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 0. Similarly, “maintaining apocalypse_maintaining” means maintaining the apocalypse operation without adding or subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 1.

  Referring to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIGS. 79A and 79B, when the apocalypse is not currently active, the apocalypse operation may start only when the winning mode is the intensive mode. I understand. Therefore, the pachi-slot 1 may perform an effect that suggests the current winning mode. For example, the current winning mode can be suggested by moving the rotary accessory 200. Specifically, the probability of moving the rotary accessory 200 is changed according to the winning mode. For example, in a situation where the player stays in the concentrated mode, the probability of moving the rotary accessory 200 is increased to a high mode or a low mode. In a situation where the user is staying, a mode in which the probability of moving the rotary accessory 200 is lowered can be considered. Similarly, in the apocalypse lottery, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the apocalypse will be activated (the guaranteed number of times is added) may be performed. In particular, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation may be performed by something different from the rotary accessory 200. Specifically, the panel device 400 may display an image corresponding to the latent image 402 in a color according to the degree of expectation.

<Apocalypse MAP lottery table>
80 and 81 are an apocalypse MAP lottery table for randomizing the apocalypse MAP for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in operation in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the larger the MAP number is, the more advantageous it is to the player. This point is not limited to the apocalypse MAP, and the same applies to other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 80 is a table referred to when the apocalypse flag is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). The apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 81 is a table referred to when the MAP data specified for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

  The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines lottery value information for each of the current apocalypse MAPs and the transfer destination apocalypse MAPs. In addition, at the initial stage when the power is turned on, “MAP0” is set as the apocalypse MAP.

<MAP data correspondence table>
The apocalypse MAP defines MAP data for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during operation. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 82, in the apocalypse MAP1, MAP data “1” is defined in the first game, and MAP data “0” is defined in the second game. When the MAP data “0” is specified, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected by referring to the apocalypse MAP random determination table shown in FIG. 81.

<Demonstration ball lottery table during apocalypse operation>
FIG. 83 is an apocalypse operating effect ball lottery table for determining effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in operation in the normal game state and the high probability game state. The apocalypse act time production ball lottery table defines lottery value information about the production balls to be set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 83, the larger the MAP data is, the more advantageous effect balls are set for the player. In addition, in FIG. 83, the confirmed balls are not randomly selected. Although a description of this point will be omitted, for example, by performing lottery to promote the effect balls set when the rare role is won, it is possible to upgrade the lottery balls 1 to 4 to the confirmed balls. Good.

  Further, in FIG. 83, the lottery value information for the effect balls is also defined for the MAP data “0”. As described above, when the MAP data is “0”, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. Here, either the lottery for the new apocalypse MAP or the lottery for the effect balls based on the MAP data “0” may be prioritized. In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, if the lottery apocalypse MAP is not used to randomly draw the production balls, the lottery apocalypse is given priority to the lottery of the production balls based on the MAP data “0”. If the lottery of the production balls is performed even once in the MAP, the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP will be prioritized. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “0”, all the MAP data in the five games is “0” (see FIG. 82), and therefore lottery of the effect balls is performed once based on the MAP data “0”, and then a new lottery is performed. The apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “1”, since the MAP data of the first game is “1” and the MAP data of the second game is “0” (see FIG. 82), the effect based on the MAP data “0” Without a lottery of balls, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly drawn after lottery of the effect balls based on the MAP data “1”.

  The same applies to other MAPs described later. Specifically, the MAP data “0” is randomly determined based on the MAP data “0” only in the first game, and the lottery is not performed based on the MAP data “0” in the second game. , Lottery a new MAP. In the case of performing such control, the lottery based on the MAP data “0” is not performed in the MAP having the MAP number “1” or more.

<Flow of production ball set to apocalypse>
Here, the flow of setting the effect ball in the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse is activated. In accordance with the operation of the apocalypse, the sub control circuit 101 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 in the apocalypse. As described above, the storage area corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state is basically maintained during the game. Therefore, when the apocalypse is activated, the performance ball maintained is set in the apocalypse. become. On the other hand, the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is also turned on at the time of setting change or at the start of business on the next day (when the predetermined time has elapsed until the power is turned on again after the power is turned off) It is cleared at a predetermined timing such as (hour). Then, when the storage area corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state is cleared, the effect balls are initially set (re-lottery) in the storage area. In the following, the flow of initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described.

  In the initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, first, the apocalypse map MAP is randomly selected. In this initial setting, the apocalypse MAP “0”, which is the initial apocalypse MAP, is initially set. In this apocalypse MAP “0”, as shown in FIG. 82, “0” is defined as the MAP data for the first game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly draws the first effect ball based on the MAP data “0” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse act time production ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the first production ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “0”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub control circuit 101 randomly draws a new apocalypse MAP without randomly drawing the effect balls. Specifically, the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “0” by referring to the apocalypse MAP random determination table referenced at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. 81. In the example shown in FIG. 81, the apocalypse MAP “1” is randomly selected as the migration destination apocalypse MAP. In this apocalypse MAP “1”, as shown in FIG. 82, “1” is defined as the MAP data of the first game, and “0” is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly draws the second effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse actuation effect lottery table shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 2” is determined as the second effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “1”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub control circuit 101 randomly draws a new apocalypse MAP without randomly drawing the effect balls. Specifically, the apocalypse MAP lottery table referenced at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. 81 is referred to and the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected from the current apocalypse MAP “1”. Referring to FIG. 81, as the transfer destination apocalypse MAP, for example, the apocalypse MAP “2” is randomly selected. In this apocalypse MAP “2”, as shown in FIG. 70, “1” is defined as the MAP data of the first game, and “0” is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 randomly draws the third effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse actuation effect lottery table shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 3” is determined as the third effect ball.

  Similarly, when six effect balls are repeatedly determined, the sub-control circuit 101 ends the effect ball lottery and sequentially stores the determined effect balls in the sub RAM 103. Although the order of determining the effect balls is arbitrary, for example, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the effect balls in the order according to each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, the sub control circuit 101 sequentially determines the effect balls to be set in the area 113A of the apocalypse 113.

<Promotion of production balls>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a method of promoting the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 during the normal game state and the high probability game state will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of a method for promoting effect balls used during the normal game state and the high-probability game state.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the normal game state and the high probability game state, a predetermined number of effect balls are stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 even when the apocalypse is inactive. The stored effect balls are not set (displayed) in the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (a) when the apocalypse is inactive, but when the apocalypse is activated, they correspond to the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (b). It is set (displayed) in the area.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, promotion lottery of effect balls (that is, effect balls that are not being displayed) stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed in the situation where the apocalypse is inactive. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the lottery balls 1 stored in the storage area “1” in FIG. 84 (a) are promoted to the lottery balls 3 as shown in FIG. 84 (c) as a result of the promotion lottery. . Then, when the apocalypse is activated, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the corresponding area of the apocalypse, as shown in FIG. 84 (d). Comparing FIGS. 84 (b) and (d), as a result of the promotion lottery, it is understood that the effect balls set in the area 113A are promoted from the lottery balls 1 to the lottery balls 3.

  Such promotion lottery will be performed when the rotary accessory 200 moves in a situation where the apocalypse is inactive. Specifically, in the pachi-slot 1, when the cover member 198 corresponding to the eyelid of the rotary accessory 200 that is the eyeball feature is released and the eyeball main body 203 corresponding to the eyeball becomes visible to the player, it is not displayed. The promotion ball lottery will be conducted. Therefore, when the eyeball main body 203 appears during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, promotion lottery of effect balls that affect the ART lottery will be performed, so that the player has the eyeball main body 203 appearing. During the period, they will play games in the hope that they will be promoted to more advantageous production balls.

<Randomized lottery table>
FIG. 85 is a winning movable lottery table for lottery whether or not to carry out the lottery for promotion of the non-display effect balls during the apocalypse non-operation of the normal game state and the high probability game state. The winning symbol movable lottery table defines information on the lottery value related to moving the rotary winning symbol 200 for each internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot 1, when the winning effect of the winning effect becomes 1 or more as a result of the lottery using the winning effect movable lottery table, the winning effect of the rotating winning effect 200 is moved to move the rotating winning effect 200 (the cover member 198 is opened). A movement request is issued to the control task (see FIG. 132 described later). As described above, while the rotary accessory 200 is moving, promotion lottery of the non-displayed effect balls is performed. Therefore, the role movable lottery table shifts to a period for performing promotion lottery. It can be said that this is a table for performing lottery as to whether or not to do.

  As shown in FIG. 85, basically, the guaranteed movable number of the winning combination is added by the rare winning combination being determined as the internal winning combination, and the winning combinations other than the rare winning combination are determined as the internal winning combinations. Therefore, it is subtracted or maintained. After the guaranteed number of movable role objects becomes 1 or more and the rotary accessory 200 moves, when the guaranteed number of movable role objects becomes 0, the rotary accessory 200 ends its movement and the cover member 198 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 configures a winning character movable lottery means, and randomly determines whether or not to carry out the promotion lottery by using the movable winning lottery table. When the number is 1 or more, a request to move the rotary accessory 200 is made.

<Direction ball promotion lottery table>
Subsequently, in FIG. 86, in a state where the rotary accessory 200 is movable (that is, when the guaranteed number of movable accessory is 1 or more), it is randomly determined whether or not to promote the non-display effect ball. It is a lottery table for production ball promotion. The effect ball promotion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the promotion number of effect balls for each internal winning combination. The effect balls corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state are provided in the order of the lottery ball 1, the lottery ball 2, the lottery ball 3, the lottery ball 4, and the confirmed ball according to the expectation degree of the ART or CZ winning. The promotion number defined in the production ball promotion lottery table indicates the number of stages in which these production balls are promoted to production balls with higher expectations. For example, “one-stage promotion” means that the lottery ball 1 is promoted to the lottery ball 2, that the lottery ball 2 is promoted to the lottery ball 3, and the “two-stage promotion” is that the lottery ball 1 is promoted. It means promotion to the lottery ball 3, promotion from the lottery ball 2 to the lottery ball 4, and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes promotion lottery means, and in the state in which the rotary accessory 200 is moving, whether or not to promote the production ball that is not displayed using the production ball promotion lottery table. Lottery.

  As described above, the sub RAM 103 stores six effect balls. Here, in the promotion lottery, when it is decided to promote the effect ball, the effect ball to be promoted is arbitrary. For example, all six effect balls may be promoted simultaneously according to the result of the promotion lottery, or only one or more effect balls to be promoted may be promoted according to the result of the promotion lottery. Good. In this case, the method of determining one or more effect balls to be promoted is also arbitrary.

  For example, it is conceivable to sequentially determine six effect balls as effect balls to be promoted. Specifically, the effect balls stored in the storage area “1” of the sub RAM 103 are first determined as the effect balls to be promoted, and then the effect balls stored in the storage area “2” are targeted for promotion. It is decided as a production ball. In this case, the timing of updating the production balls to be promoted is also arbitrary. For example, if the lottery for promotion is given a predetermined number of times for the effect balls that are finished or promoted for a predetermined number of times (note that if the lottery value is defined only for “no promotion”, it may be possible to perform promotion lottery, Also, the promotion balls to be promoted may be updated when the promotion lottery is not performed). Also, when the promotion balls to be promoted can be promoted even in one stage, the promotion balls to be promoted are selected. It may be updated, or the effect balls to be promoted may be updated when the effect balls to be promoted can be promoted to a predetermined effect ball (for example, lottery balls 4). In addition, as a result of promotion lottery, if it is decided to promote a plurality of stages, it is possible to promote only the effect balls that were the promotion target in this game by a plurality of stages, and the effect balls are one stage. While promoting, it is also possible to promote a plurality of effect balls one step at a time, such as one step for the next effect ball to be promoted, and while promoting the effect ball that was the object of promotion by two steps. A plurality of effect balls may be promoted while weighting them according to whether or not the effect balls to be promoted to the next stage are one stage.

  Further, for example, it is conceivable to determine one or a plurality of effect balls determined by lottery among the six effect balls as effect balls to be promoted. The lottery for determining the promotion balls to be promoted may be given a predetermined weight. Although the weighting method is arbitrary, for example, a production ball with a lower degree of expectation can be easily drawn as a production ball to be promoted, and a production ball with a smaller number of times determined as a production ball to be promoted It can be easily drawn as a production ball to be promoted. Even in this case, the effect balls to be promoted may be updated at any timing, and when it is decided to promote a plurality of stages, the effect balls other than the effect balls to be promoted may also be updated. It may be promoted.

<Control of rotating accessory 200 at the time of promotion>
Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the rotating accessory 200 may be controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery. As described above, the rotary accessory 200 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, and illuminates the eyeball main body 203 from the back side. At the time of promotion lottery, the eyeball main body 203 appears due to the movement of the rotary accessory 200. Therefore, the pachi-slot 1 controls the LED according to the result of the promotion lottery to make the eyeball main body 203 visible to the player in various colors. By illuminating with, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the promotion lottery in a predictable manner. For example, a mode in which an LED is controlled and the eyeball main body 203 is caused to emit light in various colors such as white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow to notify the result of the promotion lottery can be considered. Since the light emission of the plurality of LEDs provided in the rotary accessory 200 is controlled by a lamp control task described later, for example, the light emission of the eyeball main body 203 is the light emission color and the light emission of the LED corresponding to the eyeball main body 203. It is executed by requesting a pattern from the lamp control task.

  Although the pachi-slot 1 stores six effect balls in the sub RAM 103, the relationship between the emission color of the LED and the effect balls can be set arbitrarily. For example, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on the total number of promotion of the six effect balls. As an example, when the total number of promotion of six effect balls is "1" or less, the LED emits "white", and when the total number is "3" or less, the LED emits "blue", When the total number is "5" or less, the LED emits "yellow".

  Further, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on any one of the six effect balls or a plurality of types of the effect balls after promotion. Specifically, as a result of the promotion lottery, based on the type of the production ball with the highest expectation of the six production balls, for example, when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 1, the LED is set to " The LED emits "white" when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 2, the LED emits "blue", and the LED is "yellow" when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 3. Emits light.

  According to the latter method, any one or more of the six effect balls are promoted to the effect balls with high expectations, and the other effect balls remain as the effect balls with low expectations. However, the LED emits light with a color with high expectations such as red and rainbow, and as a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a color with high expectations. On the other hand, when the six effect balls are uniformly promoted and all of the six effect balls are effect balls with relatively low expectations, the LEDs have low expectations such as blue and yellow. The result is that the eyeball main body 203 emits light in a color with low expectations.

  On the other hand, according to the former method, when the total number of promotion of 6 effect balls is small, even if any of the 6 effect balls are promoted to the effect balls with high expectations, the LED is expected. Light is emitted in a color with low intensity, and as a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light in a color with low expectation. On the contrary, when the total number of promotion of 6 effect balls is large, even if all of the 6 effect balls are effect balls with relatively low expectations, the LED has a high expectation color. The result is that the eyeball main body 203 emits light in a color with high expectations.

  Also, the light emission of the LED may be controlled by combining the former method and the latter method. Specifically, if the total number of promotion balls for the six effect balls is large, or if any one or more of the six effect balls are promoted to the effect balls with high expectations, the LED will have high expectations. If one or more of the individual production balls are promoted to production balls with high expectations and the total number of promotion of 6 production balls is large, the LED is not emitted in high color The light may be emitted in a high color.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, two types of lottery, that is, the movable lottery of the rotary accessory 200 and the promotion lottery of the effect balls are individually performed. It is possible to perform only ball promotion lottery. Specifically, as a result of the lottery for promotion of effect balls, if it is decided to promote the effect balls, the rotary accessory 200 may be moved and the eyeball main body 203 may appear on the surface.

  As in the present embodiment, by individually performing two types of lottery, the movable lottery of the rotary accessory 200 and the promotion lottery of the effect balls, it is possible to create a game period in which the effect balls are promoted. From the player's point of view, during this game period, there is a chance period for promoting the effect balls, so the interest during the period when the eyeball main body 203 is visible is improved.

  On the other hand, even in such a chance period, in the case of non-winning in the promotion lottery performed individually, the effect balls are not promoted, so in the method of performing two lottery individually as in the present embodiment, Even if the eyeball main body 203 becomes visible, the effect ball may not be promoted. In this respect, in the method of performing the lottery only for the production balls and moving the rotary accessory 200 when it is decided to promote the production balls, the production balls are always promoted when the eyeball main body 203 becomes visible. As a result, the player can have expectations for the subsequent game.

<ART lottery table when reel is stopped>
FIG. 87 is a view showing the reel stop time ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of reel stop during the normal game state and the high probability game state. The reel stop ART lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 113A. Here, as described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped, the effect balls set in the area 113A are when the combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped is “bell winning” or more. Only affects the lottery result. Therefore, the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 is a table that is referred only when the effect balls are set in the area 113A and the symbol combination displayed when the reel is stopped is “bell winning” or more. is there.

  Referring to the ART lottery table during reel stop shown in FIG. 87, the probability of winning the CZ or ART is different according to the effect balls set in the area 113A. You can be sure that you will win.

[Game during high probability game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, the flow of the game other than the transition lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described. As described above, the high-probability gaming state corresponds to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and when the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, it becomes high. The probability game state also ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state. The case where the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state on the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is an incorrect answer to the push order bell or the push order lip as described above. Therefore, the high-probability game state ends at the timing when the sub side grasps that the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of an incorrect answer is displayed on the push order bell or the push order lip. Here, if the high-probability gaming state ends immediately and shifts to the normal gaming state even though the normal gaming state can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, the interest is lost. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability game state, the correct pressing order is notified to the pressing order bell and the pressing order lip only for a predetermined number of times.

  88 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during the high-probability game state, and FIG. 89 is a data table referred to during the high-probability game state. The data table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76.

<Outline of game flow during high-probability game state>
Referring to FIG. 88, when a combination of symbols relating to the RT4 transition lip is displayed during the non-winning in the ART transition lottery in the normal game state, the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. At this point, the gaming state on the sub side is the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). In this normal game state (RT4 game state), when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 91. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the internal winning combination is determined, the avoidance points are randomly determined based on the determined internal winning combination. When the avoidance point is obtained in this lottery, the sub control circuit 101 first shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. The lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability game state described above in FIG. 66 corresponds to the lottery for this avoidance point.

  In the high-probability game state, the situation where the main side shifts to the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state is avoided based on the obtained avoidance points. Specifically, in the high-probability game state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 determines, based on the internal winning combination, whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is the push order bell or the push order lip, the sub control circuit 101 determines that there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state.

  When there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the push order bell or the push order lip determined as the internal winning combination is correct only when the avoidance points remain. It informs the pushing order. By receiving this notification, the player can perform the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer, and the high-probability game state ends (that is, the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state ends up shifting. Can be avoided. If there is no avoidance point, the player himself / herself selects the pushing order that is the correct answer.

After that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the game state is shifted on the main side based on the combination of the symbols displayed. Specifically, when the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, otherwise, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state is maintained. .. On the sub side, the sub control circuit 101 ends the high-probability game state and starts the normal game state from the next game when the game state of the main side shifts to the RT1 game state of the bonus non-winning state. On the other hand, the sub control circuit 101 maintains the high-probability game state when the main-side game state maintains the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state, and sets the next game to the high-probability game state.
The above flow is the flow of the game during the high probability game state.

<Avoidance point lottery table>
FIG. 89 is an avoidance point lottery table referred to in the normal game state (RT4 game state). The avoidance point lottery table defines the number of replays determined as the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), and the lottery value information for the avoidance points to be added for each internal winning combination in the current game. .. As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referred to based on the number of times replay is determined as the internal winning combination. Note that, in FIG. 89, the number of times the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is different between "0 times" and "1 or more times", but the number of times the tables are changed is not limited to this. ..

  Referring to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 89, when the replay is determined as the internal winning combination one or more times in the normal game state (RT4 game state), the probability that the avoidance points are given is increased, and particularly, the replay is 1 In the replay that is determined as the internal winning combination after being determined as the internal winning combination more than once, the avoidance points are easily given. Note that, as described above, in the RT4 game state, the probability of the combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is high. Therefore, when the normal game state (RT4 game state) continues for several games, avoidance points are given. Will be.

[Game during CZ]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95, the flow of the game during CZ will be described. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game in the CZ, and FIGS. 91 to 95 are data tables referred to in the CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 91 to 95 are stored in the ROM cartridge board 76.

<Outline of game flow during CZ>
As described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) in the normal game state or the high-probability game state, if the CZ is won, the game state shifts to CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit constitutes the lottery state start means, and when the winning is CZ in the transition lottery, the gaming state is shifted to CZ. As shown in FIG. 90, in the first game after the CZ transition, when the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started in accordance with the start operation, the lottery of CZ_MAP is performed. The CZ is a complete-run type chance zone in which a maximum of 30 games continue, while it ends when the lottery (C) for transition to ART performed in the middle is “maintained”. As for the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed in the middle of the CZ, the winning probability of the ART increases as the CZ continues. CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the winning probability of ART is increased in the transition lottery (C) to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

  When CZ_MAP is randomly selected in the first game after the transition to CZ, the ineffective points are subsequently randomly selected. The lottery for the invalid points includes lottery with an initial value performed in the first game after the CZ transition and additional lottery performed in each game during CZ. The invalid point is information that determines the number of times that the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed in the middle of CZ is made “invalid”.

  Next, lottery of the production balls set in the apocalypse is performed. After that, in the games other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not the expansion balls are set in the current game, that is, whether or not the expansion balls are set in the area 113A. If the development ball is set in this game, the transfer lottery (C) to the ART in the middle of CZ may be performed, and if the development ball is not set, basically it is concerned. The transfer lottery (C) is not performed. Specifically, when the development ball is set, the ineffective point is 0, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery (C) for shifting to ART in the middle of CZ is performed. In addition, the transfer lottery during the CZ has a different winning probability of the ART depending on the CZ mode, and if the CZ mode is 1 or more, the ART is always won. The CZ_MAP described above is a MAP that sets the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 92).

  Here, if the development ball is set in this game and the invalid point is 1 or more, or if the avoidance ball is set in this game, an effect suggesting the current CZ mode is performed. May be Specifically, since the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 is set in CZ_MAP, the current CZ mode is 1 and the number of games in the CZ mode changes from 0 to 1 Whether to go up can be specified from CZ_MAP. When the current CZ mode is 1, or when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within a few times (for example, a few times), the sub control circuit 101 is compared with other cases. By performing a different mode of effect, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the current CZ mode.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the game of the 30th game of CZ, a lottery (C) for shifting to ART is performed. In this case, the transfer lottery (C) to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 is performed without fail, and the ART is won as if the player has completed the chance zone. When the CZ is completed as described above, the more advantageous ART game state is entered. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CZ is completed (30 games), the transfer lottery (C) to the ART is performed.

  During the CZ, when the lottery (C) for shifting to ART accompanying the development ball is performed at the time of start, the following processing is performed. Specifically, after that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is “bell winning” or more, that is, the pressing order is the correct answer in the pressing order of the bell. Judge whether or not. If the correct answer is given to the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) due to the development ball is invalidated regardless of whether or not the winning is given to the ART, and the CZ continues. become. On the other hand, in the case of an incorrect answer in the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) associated with the development ball is maintained, and thereafter, the game state is shifted to the lottery result. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the game state control means, performs the ART transfer lottery (C) during CZ, and shifts the game state to the ART game state according to the lottery result.

  As described above, in the CZ, the more the CZ continues, the higher the probability of winning the transfer lottery (C) to the ART increases. In addition, when the CZ is completed, the player always wins the transfer lottery (C) to the ART, and As the CZ continues for a long time, the situation becomes more advantageous to the player because the advantageous ART game state is entered. Therefore, the player will play the game so that the CZ continues. Here, the end condition of CZ is that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to ART is maintained, so that the player does not set the development ball in the apocalypse and the development ball in the apocalypse. In the game that is set, the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination, and in the game where the development ball is set in the apocalypse, if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, The game will be played so that the correct answer is given in the order of pressing.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 91 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referenced in the first game after the CZ transition. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines information on lottery values for the types of CZ_MAP. After shifting to CZ, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and randomly determines the CZ_MAP used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 92 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP that is randomly selected by the CZ_MAP random determination table. In each of CZ_MAP, a CZ mode is set for each continuous game number in the CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the winning probability of the ART in the transition lottery (C) to the ART during the CZ as described above, and the higher the numerical value of the CZ mode is, the higher the winning probability of the ART is set. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, each of CZ_MAP is set so that the CZ mode goes up each time the number of continuous games in the CZ increases, and does not go down once the CZ mode goes up. That is, the respective CZ_MAPs are set so that the number of games that go from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAPs, the CZ mode is set to 2 when the number of continuous games is 30.

  In the present embodiment, only three types of CZ modes, CZ modes 0, 1 and 2, are provided. However, in the present invention, the CZ mode increases every time the number of continuous games in the CZ increases, and the CZ mode once increases. The CZ mode is not limited to three types as long as it is set so that the mode does not fall when it goes up.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 93 is an invalid point lottery table. The ineffective point lottery table is for extracting the ineffective points for invalidating the transition lottery (C) to the ART performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development balls in the CZ are set. Used for. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the transition lottery (C) to the ART performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set is invalidated. When the number of invalid points is 1 or more, the transfer lottery (C) may be performed once and then invalidated, or the transfer lottery (C) may not be performed in the first place.

  As described above, the lottery of invalid points includes the lottery of the initial value performed in the first game after the CZ transition and the additional lottery performed in each game during the CZ. FIG. 93 (A) is an invalid point random determination table used for random determination of initial values, and defines lottery value information for invalid points determined as initial values. Further, (B) and (C) of FIG. 93 are invalid point lottery tables used for additional lottery, and lottery for invalid points to be added for each type of effect ball and internal winning combination set in this game. Specifies value information.

<Direction lottery table>
FIG. 94 is an effect ball lottery table used when lottery effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during CZ. The lottery value information for the effect balls to be set is defined for each final effect ball being set. The final effect ball being set is, for example, the effect ball set in the area 113E farthest from the current game. Referring to FIG. 94, when the final effect ball in the set is an expanded ball, the expanded ball is not randomly selected. That is, during the CZ, two development balls are not continuously set in the apocalypse areas 113A to 113E. On the other hand, when the final effect ball in the set is other (blank or avoidance ball), the developed ball is randomly selected with a predetermined probability.

  In CZ, either the development ball or the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse, but as shown in the production ball lottery table, in the production ball lottery, only the development ball or the blank (empty) is randomly selected. Avoidance balls are not randomly selected. Here, the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse by overwriting the set development ball when the invalid point is 1 or more and the development ball is set in the apocalypse. When the number of invalid points is 1 or more, the timing of rewriting the developed ball to the avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, of the areas 113A to 113E, the developed ball may not be rewritten to the avoidance ball until the area 113B is reached. Alternatively, the end of the CZ may be avoided by maintaining the expanded ball at the time of the area 113A and invalidating the transfer lottery (C) itself.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 95 is a CZ-art ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (C) to CZ ART. The CZ ART ART lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery (C), for each winning / no winning of the CZ mode and BB. By referring to the ART lottery table during CZ, it is understood that the probability of winning the ART is low when the CZ mode is 0 and the ART is always won when the CZ mode is 1 or more when the BB is not winning. In the CZ mode, the higher the numerical value of the winning probability of ART in the transfer lottery (C) or the degree of advantage of ART at the time of winning the ART, the more advantageous it is to the player. There is no need to set it to.

[Game during BB]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 101, the flow of the game in the bonus state (also referred to as “in BB”) will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side in BB and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. Yes, FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game in BB, and FIGS. 98 to 101 are data tables referred to in BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 are stored in the ROM cartridge board 76.

<Correspondence between main side and sub side of winning combination>
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side in BB and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. is there. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. 96. The correspondence relationship other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 96 is the same as that in FIG. 67.

<Outline of game flow during BB>
As shown in FIG. 97, the game in BB is triggered by the operation of BB. When the BB operation is performed, the BB mode is set to 0. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the winning probability of ART in the lottery (F) for shifting to ART performed during BB. The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as BB modes, and the larger the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the winning probability of ART.

  Subsequently, when the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started during the BB in accordance with the start operation, the transfer lottery (F) to the ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. Regardless of the above-mentioned BB mode, the transition lottery (F) at the start is won in the ART when the abbreviation “7 sets of rep” on the sub side is determined as the internal winning combination, and in other cases. No winning for ART.

  Then, based on the internal winning combination in the BB, the mode up lottery of the BB mode is performed. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination that may be mode-up is defined for each current BB mode. Although details will be described later, in the pachi-slot 1, the higher the BB mode, the smaller the number of types of winning combinations that may be mode-up.

  After that, when the medals are paid out according to the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the operation of the BB is ended. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the BB ends when more than 59 medals are paid out in the BB. If more than 59 medals have not yet been paid out, the operation of the BB continues. On the other hand, when more than 59 medals have been paid out, a lottery (F) for shifting to ART at the end of BB is performed. The transition lottery (F) at the end is a lottery performed according to the BB mode, and the larger the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the winning probability of ART.

  When the BB ends while winning the ART, the ART (enemy deciding ART) starts from the next game. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, in the BB, in a situation where the winning combination related to JACIN is carried over as an internal winning combination, a high RT state (RT4 gaming state) is entered, and a symbol corresponding to the winning combination related to JACIN. When the combination of is displayed, it shifts to the low RT state (RT2 game state). Then, after the end of the BB, the RT game state in the BB is maintained, so after the end of the BB, the RT state becomes a high RT state or a low RT state depending on the result of the game in the BB.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, if the BB ends while winning the ART, the ART may be executed at the timing of shifting to the high RT state, and regardless of the type of the RT gaming state, ART (more specifically, AT) may be executed. That is, when the BB ends in the low RT state, the enemy determination ART may be started without waiting for the transition to the high RT state. In this case, the enemy-deciding ART has a low probability that the replay combination will be determined as an internal winning combination, but informs the correct pressing order according to the pressing order combination, and the apocalypse according to the control during the enemy-deciding ART. A production ball is set. As will be described later, during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the ally character may increase as a result of the ally ball being set in the apocalypse. If the HP of the ally character increases, the subsequent battle ART is won. The possibility of (continuing) increases. Even if the enemy determination ART is started in the low RT state, it is possible to give the player a profit of increasing the HP of the ally character (that is, increasing the expectation of continuing the ART game state). It is possible to reduce the disadvantages to the player who has finished BB.

<ART lottery table at BB start>
FIG. 98 is an ART lottery table at the start of BB referred to in the transition lottery (F) at the start of BB. The BB start ART lottery table is referred to when the sub-side abbreviation “7 sets of rep” is determined, and defines the lottery value information for the transition lottery result to ART. As shown in FIG. 98, when the sub-side abbreviation “7 sets of rep” has been determined, the ART is always won in the transition lottery (F) at the start.

  Here, referring to the correspondence table of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC2 flags (the state where JACIN2 is carried over as an internal winning combination) and between the JAC3 flags (the state where JACIN3 is carried over as the internal winning combination), the main Only three “F_312 upper 7 sets” to “F_2nd cross 7 sets” on the side are “7 sets Lip”. On the other hand, between the JAC1 flags (when JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper row 7 rep" to "F_J1 cross 7 row" to "F_2nd cross 7 row"-"F_J1 cross row 7" on the main side A total of 6 including "3 rep" are "7 rep." Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the probability of winning the ART in the transition lottery (F) at the start varies depending on the type of carryover combination carried over to the BB.

<BB mode up lottery table>
99 and FIG. 100 are BB in-mode mode up lottery tables referred to in BB mode mode up lottery. The BB mode up lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the mode up lottery for each of the current BB mode and the internal winning combination.

  Referring to the BB middle mode up lottery table, when the current BB mode is 0, if any of the push order bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry or chanrip is determined as the internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. In other words, there are six types of winning combinations that may be upgraded from BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 1, four types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 2, and modes from BB mode 3 There are three types of winning combinations that may be up, and two types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 4.

  In addition, a winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 4 is included in a winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 3, and similarly, a winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 3. Is included in a winning combination that may be up in BB mode 2, and a winning combination that may be up in BB mode 2 is included in a winning combination that may be up in BB mode 1. The winning combinations that may be mode-up from the BB mode 1 are included in the winning combinations that may be mode-up in the BB mode 0.

  As described above, in Pachi-slot 1, the higher the BB mode, the smaller the number of types of winning combinations that may be mode-up, and the higher the BB mode is, the more winning combinations are likely to be mode-up. , There is a possibility that the mode is up even if the BB mode is low.

  In the BB mode up random determination table illustrated in FIGS. 99 and 100, the BB mode is skipped one step at a time so that the mode can be increased (for example, BB mode 0 without passing through BB mode 1). It is possible to mode up to 2 or more). In this respect, the BB mode mode lottery table may be configured such that the BB mode is always mode-up only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode can go up only by one step, the expectation during staying in each BB mode is lowered, so that it is possible to skip the BB mode and increase the BB mode. Can be set to increase the expectation of rising. As a result, it becomes easy to go up to a certain BB mode in the BB, so it becomes easy to create a game mode in which the BB mode gradually goes up.

  Here, referring to the BB mode up lottery tables shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, when the internal winning combination is chanrip, the BB mode is likely to rise. Further, referring to the winning combination correspondence table shown in FIG. 96, among the JAC1 flags and the JAC3 flags, only five “F_J3 chance rep 1” to “F_J3 cherry rep” on the main side are “chanp”. On the other hand, between the JAC2 flags, a total of 10 items, which are five of "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" on the main side, are added to the "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip". "It has become. Therefore, in Pachi-slot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB, and as a result, the transition at the end of the BB depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB. The probability of winning the ART in the lottery (F) is different.

<ART lottery table at the end of BB>
101 is the BB end ART lottery table referred to in the transfer lottery (F) at the end of the BB. The BB end ART lottery table defines the lottery value information for the transition lottery result to ART for each BB state and each BB mode. Note that the BB end ART lottery table of FIG. 101 (A) is referred to in the main side gaming state “bonus state RB gaming state” “bonus state RT4 gaming state”, and FIG. 101 (B) BB The ART lottery table at the end is referred to in the main side game state “bonus state RT0 game state” “bonus state RT2 game state” (see FIG. 17).

[Game during ART]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 121, the flow of the game during the ART game state (also referred to as “during ART”) will be described. 102 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during the enemy determination ART, FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the battle ART, and FIGS. 104 to 121 are referred to during the ART. Data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 121 are stored in the ROM cartridge board 76.

<Outline of game flow during ART>
As shown in FIG. 102, when the selection lottery to the ART is won in the normal game state (normal game state, high-probability game state, CZ) or the bonus state, the sub control circuit 101 determines whether the lottery is won in the transition lottery. The ART status is randomly selected. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation for the continuation of the ART gaming state is different, and basically, the ART state having the larger numerical value is more likely to continue the ART (advantageous for the player). When the ART state is determined and the game state on the main side shifts to the RT4 game state of the bonus non-winning state, the enemy determination ART starts.

  When all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate during the enemy decision ART due to the start operation, lottery of the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse is performed. In the enemy determination ART, effect balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for deciding an enemy character to fight during the battle ART and a ally ball for increasing the HP of the ally character are set in the apocalypse. .. The ART state determined before the start of the enemy determination ART is referred to in the lottery of the effect balls, and as the ART state having a larger numerical value is set, the boss ball in which the ally character is more likely to win is set in the apocalypse.

  The lottery of the effect balls will be performed based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP described later and the ART state. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then the boss MAP having a larger value is set as the same enemy determination ART continues.

  If a boss ball is set in the apocalypse immediately after the enemy decision ART starts, there is a possibility that the enemy decision ART ends immediately after it starts. Therefore, at the time of starting the enemy determination ART, the guaranteed number of times that the effect balls are not set in the apocalypse may be set. By doing so, since the enemy determination ART continues for the minimum guaranteed number of times, it is possible to prevent the enemy determination ART from ending immediately after the start. The guaranteed number may be a predetermined fixed number (for example, 5 games), or may be determined by lottery at the time of starting the enemy determination ART. Also, if the guaranteed number of times is different between the enemy-deciding ART (so-called first hit) started when the lottery for winning the transition to the ART is won, and the enemy-deciding ART started when the ART game state continues. It may be done. Also in this case, the fixed guaranteed number of times may be different in both cases, and the random number of guaranteed number of times may be different in both cases. Further, when the ART game state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be changed according to the type of the enemy character who has fought in the continuing battle ART. Also in this case, the fixed guarantee count may be changed or the lottery probability of the guarantee count may be changed according to the type of the enemy character who has fought in the continuing battle ART.

  Then, the HP of the teammate character is determined. The HP of the teammate character determined here will be used in the following battle ART. The HP of the teammate character is determined based on the initial decision made in the first game of the enemy determination ART and the lottery for the later-described addition performed when the teammate ball is set in the apocalypse.

  The initial determination is different in control depending on whether or not the HP of the current ally character is less than the initial value (HP50), and the sub control circuit 101 initializes the HP of the ally character when the HP is less than the initial value. If the value is determined and is equal to or more than the initial value, the HP of the current ally character is maintained as it is. In Pachi-slot 1, when the teammate character wins the battle ART, the enemy determination ART is performed again. At this time, since the HP of the teammate character fluctuates in accordance with the result of the continuous ART (for example, HP increase due to the teammate ball (addition lottery) in the continuous ART enemy determination ART, or the continuous ART battle ART). In the middle enemy ball (HP reduction due to enemy attack) and the new enemy determination ART after continuing, the HP of the ally character is set according to the change from the initial value.

  Then, the sub-control circuit 101 performs control according to the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. For example, when a boss ball is set, it is determined whether the push order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the boss according to the type of boss ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an opponent determining means, and determines the opponent in the battle ART according to the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse in this game.

  When the opponent of the battle ART is determined in this way, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The HP of the enemy character is determined based on the internal winning combination of the next game in which the opponent is determined. For example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the HP of the enemy character is reduced. Is decided. When the opponent is decided in the enemy decision ART (push order bell win at the time of the boss ball) and the HP of the enemy character is decided (internal win part of the next game), the enemy decision ART ends and the next game starts. Battle ART will start. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state starting means and determines the HP of the opponent and the enemy character of the opponent based on the boss ball set during the enemy determination ART. , The enemy ART ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game.

  On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a teammate ball, the sub-control circuit 101 performs lottery on the HP of the teammate character. In this additional lottery, the HP of the teammate character is increased (added) based on the internal winning combination. Specifically, if a teammate ball is set in the apocalypse in the game this time, more than “bell winning” will be added to the lottery, and the HP of the teammate character will increase. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical addition means, and when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse, the HP of the ally character is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery result is obtained. Based on, the HP of the teammate character is increased (added). "Bell winning" means that the push order bell or common bell is decided as the internal winning combination, and "bell winning" or higher means "bell winning", pure deviant, watermelon, weak cherry, strong. Either a rare role such as cherry or chanrip is decided as an internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the enemy determination ART is repeatedly performed until the opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the first advantageous state control means, and determines the enemy character to fight during the battle ART, determines the HP of the teammate character, and adds lottery when the ART is continued. And so on.

  As shown in FIG. 103, when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate during the battle ART in accordance with the start operation, lottery of the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse is performed. In the battle ART, effect balls such as a friend ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball for determining a character to attack are set in the apocalypse. As will be described later, parameters such as offensive power, defense power, and speed are set for each enemy character, and lottery of effect balls is performed according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, an enemy character having a faster speed has a higher probability of being randomly selected, and an enemy character having a slower speed has a higher probability of being randomly selected.

  Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the teammate character and the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a teammate ball or an awakening ball, the teammate character attacks the enemy character with "Bell winning" or higher, and the HP of the enemy character is HP. Is reduced. In addition, in this game, the production ball set in the apocalypse is an awakening ball, and in the case of "Bell winning" or more, the ally ball is stocked and the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is the stocked amount. It can be rewritten as a ally ball.

  On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the enemy character attacks the ally character with "bell winning", the HP of the ally character decreases, and the "rare role" With “win”, the teammate character attacks the enemy character, and the HP of the enemy character decreases. The “rare winning combination” means that one of the rare winning combinations such as a pure win, a watermelon, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Here, the HP reduction amount of the ally character when attacking the enemy character differs depending on the attack power set for the enemy character, and the enemy character having a higher attack power has a larger HP reduction amount of the ally character and thus has a higher attack power. The lower the enemy character, the smaller the HP reduction amount of the teammate character. Similarly, the amount of HP reduction of an enemy character when attacking a teammate character differs depending on the defense power set for the enemy character. The higher the defense power of the enemy character, the smaller the reduction amount of HP of the enemy character, and the more the defense power is. The lower the enemy character, the greater the amount of decrease in HP of the enemy character. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical subtraction means and reduces the HP of the teammate character when the effect ball set in the apocalypse during the battle ART is an enemy ball (third effect information). (Subtract), and in the case of a friend ball (fourth effect information), the HP of the enemy character is reduced (subtracted).

  As shown in FIG. 103, the battle ART ends when the HP of either the ally character or the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the battle ART ends and the ART game state for one set ends. On the other hand, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0, the battle ART ends with the number of sets in the ART gaming state unchanged. When the number of sets in the ART gaming state remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART gaming state continues, and the battle ART shifts to a new enemy determination ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state control means and the advantageous state control means, and sets the effect ball attacked by the enemy character during the battle ART to the apocalypse, the ally character and the enemy character. It controls the transition to the enemy-decision ART by the battle with, the termination of the ART gaming state based on the result of the battle, or the continuation of the ART gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes continuous control means, and when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle, or when the HP of the ally character becomes 0, it is in the ART game state. When the number of sets remains, the ART game state is continued, and the game state is changed from the battle ART to the enemy decision ART.

<ART status lottery table>
FIG. 104 is an ART state lottery table that is referred to in order to lottery the ART state at the time of winning the transition to ART. The ART state lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the ART state for each situation when the lottery for transition to ART is won. For example, if you win in the transition lottery (A) (D) performed in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, refer to the ART state lottery table in the “normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state” column. Then, the ART state is randomly selected. Similarly, in the case of winning in the transfer lottery (C) to the ART in the CZ, the ART state is randomly selected by referring to the ART state lottery table corresponding to the CZ mode in the CZ. In addition, when the winning in the lottery (F) for shifting to ART in the bonus state is won, the ART state is randomly selected by referring to the ART state lottery table in the “bonus state column”.

  Referring to FIG. 104, in the case where the transfer lottery is won in the CZ mode 2, the ART state having a larger numerical value is randomly selected than in the case where the transfer lottery is won in the CZ modes 0 and 1, and in other cases. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is the CZ mode when the player completes the CZ, and the ART state is in a state in which the larger the value, the more advantageous the ART is for the player (the state in which the ART is easy to continue). It is understood that when the player completes the race, not only the ART shift but also a more advantageous state for the player.

<Various data tables referenced during enemy decision ART>
Subsequently, various data tables referred to during the enemy determination ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 111.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 105 is a boss MAP lottery table for randomizing the boss MAP for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then, when the boss MAP data specified for each boss MAP is 0, a new boss MAP is randomly selected. The boss MAP lottery table of FIG. 105 is a table that is referred to in order to randomly draw a new boss MAP when the boss MAP data is 0.

  Referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, it is understood that in the pachi-slot 1, every time the boss MAP is randomly selected, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is easily randomized. Specifically, the boss MAP “1” is likely to be randomly selected, and the boss MAP “3” is likely to be randomly selected as the boss MAP “3”. On the other hand, when the boss MAP “1” is randomly selected from the boss MAP “4”, the boss MAP “3” is likely to be randomly selected from the boss MAP “4”, so the value of the boss MAP is once reduced. However, since the boss MAP “3” is subsequently selected, the boss MAP “5” is randomly selected. As a result, each time the boss MAP is selected, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is randomly selected.

  Further, referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, if the boss MAP is updated to the boss MAP “52” as a result of the lottery of the boss MAP being repeated, then the boss MAP “52” or the boss MAP. It can be seen that only one of “53” is randomly selected and the other bosses MAP are not randomly selected. As will be described later in detail, when these boss MAPs “52” and “53” are set as the boss MAP, the effect ball advantageous for the player is determined as the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse. Therefore, it can be said that the boss MAPs “52” and “53” that are set as a result of the lottery of the boss MAP being repeated are the ceiling of the boss MAP, but when the ceiling of the boss MAP is reached, an advantageous effect for the player The ball will be set in the apocalypse.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
In the boss MAP, boss MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is defined. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined in each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 106, in boss MAP1, boss MAP data "1" is defined for the first to fourth games, and boss MAP data "0" is defined for the fifth game. When the boss MAP data “0” is specified, a new boss MAP is randomly selected by referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105.

<Enemy decision ART production ball lottery table>
107 and FIG. 108 are the attraction ball lottery tables during the enemy determination ART for determining the attraction balls to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. The in-art lottery ball lottery table defines the boss MAP data and lottery value information about the lottery balls to be set for each ART state. In addition, in (A) of FIG. 107, the lottery value information for the effect balls is defined for the boss MAP data “0”, but a lottery value that is newer than that for the effect balls based on the MAP data “0” is determined. It is not used when priority is given to MAP lottery.

  Referring to FIGS. 107 and 108, when the boss MAP data is “1”, “2”, and “4”, the lottery effect balls are almost constant regardless of the ART state, while the boss MAP data “3” is selected. In the case of “”, the effect balls that are randomly selected greatly differ depending on the ART state. For example, referring to the ART state “28” and above in the case of the boss MAP data “3”, it can be seen that either the boss ball 7 or 8 is determined as the effect ball. The boss balls 7 and 8 are effect balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is decided when the opponents are decided (see FIG. 68). Also, referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 106, it can be seen that the boss MAP data “3” is defined by many boss MAPs, and in many cases, the effect ball is based on the boss MAP data “3”. You can see that is drawn.

  From this, it is understood that the larger the value of the ART state, the more advantageous the ART is for the player, and since "28" or more is randomly selected as the ART state when the CZ is completed (see FIG. 104), the CZ is completed. It can be seen that the moving ART is easy to continue.

  In addition, referring to FIGS. 106 and 107, when the boss MAP is “52”, “4” is defined as the boss MAP data, and one of the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined. You can see that it will be decided as a production ball. Similarly, when the boss MAP is "53", "2" is defined as the boss MAP data, and it is understood that the teammate ball that increases the physical strength (HP) of the teammate character is determined as the effect ball.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 105, the bosses MAP “52” and “53” are ceilings of the bosses MAP that are set when the lottery of the bosses MAP is repeated. Then, when the ceiling of the boss MAP is reached, only the boss balls 7 and 8 whose continuation is determined or the ally ball that increases the HP of the ally character is set in the apocalypse, and the subsequent ART is easily continued. I see. That is, in the present embodiment, the boss MAP lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 is a boss that defines boss MAP data (lottery value information) for determining effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART. A lottery information storage means for storing a plurality of MAPs (lottery information) is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes lottery information determination means, determines the boss MAP by referring to the boss MAP lottery table, and determines the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse based on the boss MAP. Then, the boss MAP concerned is updated to another boss MAP.

<Random lottery table for encouraging ART during production>
FIG. 109 is a lottery table for increasing the number of enemies decided during the ART determination, which is referred to in order to rewrite the enemy balls set in the apocalypse into the team balls. The enemies-determined ART mid-stage production ball upgrade lottery table defines information on lottery values for the number of ally ball stocks for each internal winning combination. When the stock of one or more ally balls is determined by this lottery, the boss balls are rewritten as ally balls according to the number of stocks. The timing of rewriting the boss ball into the friend ball is arbitrary. Referring to FIG. 109, when a rare role (pure edge, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, chanlip) is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a ally ball is stocked.

(Rewriting to friend ball)
Here, with reference to FIG. 155, an operation example when rewriting a boss ball into a friend ball will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation when rewriting a boss ball into a friend ball during the enemy determination ART.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the present game, the sub RAM 103 has a boss ball 1 in the storage area "1", a boss ball 2 in the storage area "2", a boss ball 1 in the storage area "3", and a storage area. The boss ball 4 is stored in “4”, the ally ball is stored in the storage area “5”, and the boss ball 3 is stored in the storage area “6”. As described above, the effect balls stored in the storage areas “1” to “5” of the sub RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the apocalypse and are stored in the storage area “6” of the sub RAM 103. The ball is not set in the apocalypse (hidden).

  When the rewriting to the ally ball is not performed (the stock of the ally ball is “0”), the effect ball stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 is slid as shown in FIG. In the storage areas "1" to "5" of the game, the effect balls stored in the storage areas "2" to "6" of the current game are stored, and in the storage area "6" of the next game, the lottery is performed. The performed ball is newly stored.

  On the other hand, if there is a stock of friendly balls, the boss balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten as friendly balls. FIG. 155 (b) is an example of rewriting the boss ball when the stock of the ally ball is "2". When the stock of the ally ball is "2", the two boss balls are rewritten as the ally ball. Since the effect balls stored in the storage area "1" of the current game do not exist in the next game, they are stored in the storage areas "2" and "3" of the current game in the example shown in FIG. 155 (b). The two boss balls that exist are rewritten as ally balls in the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), the boss balls on the front side (the storage area “1” side of the storage areas “1” to “6”) are sequentially rewritten as ally balls. The method of determining the boss ball is arbitrary. For example, the boss balls 1 to 8 may be prioritized and the boss balls to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority order. It is also preferable to set the priority order based on, for example, the expected level of continuation of the battle ART. That is, the continuation expectation level of the battle ART may be set for each of the boss balls 1 to 8, and the boss balls to be rewritten may be determined in order from the boss ball having the lowest (or high) continuation expectation level.

  Further, it is also preferable to set the priority order based on the stock number of ally balls. For example, when the stock number of ally balls is a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8, When the stock number of ally balls is a specific number (for example, “2”), the boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the second priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8.

  It is also preferable to set the priority order based on the internal winning combination when the ally balls are stocked. For example, when stocking of ally balls is triggered by a predetermined winning combination (for example, watermelon) being determined as an internal winning combination, based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8. If the boss ball to be rewritten is decided and the stock of ally balls is triggered by the fact that the specific winning combination (for example, Chance Lip) is decided as the internal winning combination, The boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the set second priority.

  By rewriting the boss ball into a teammate ball according to the stock of teammates, the HP of the teammate character increases, and as a result, it becomes difficult for the teammate character's HP to become “0” in the battle ART, and as a result, the battle ART is easily continued. Become. Here, as described above, the boss balls 7 and 8 are boss balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined, and if it is rewritten as a ally ball, it is rather difficult to continue the battle ART. Therefore, the boss balls 7 and 8 may be maintained without being rewritten as ally balls. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a specific winning combination rewriting means, and when the rare winning wins internally, the boss ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a ally ball, and the target boss ball is the boss ball. If it is 7 or 8, it is maintained without being rewritten as a ally ball. In addition, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the boss ball to be rewritten in the first priority based on the internal winning of the predetermined winning combination, and rewrites it in the second priority based on the internal winning of the specific winning combination. Determine the target boss ball.

  FIG. 155 (c) is a diagram showing an example of rewriting a boss ball when the boss ball 7 or the boss ball 8 is stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103. In FIG. 155 (c), the stock of ally balls is "2", and in the storage areas "1" to "6" of the present game, boss ball 1, boss ball 7, boss ball 1 and boss ball 4, respectively. The ally ball and the boss ball 3 are stored. When the boss balls on the front side are rewritten in order to the ally balls, the boss balls 7 and 1 stored in the storage areas “2” and “3” are determined as the boss balls to be rewritten. In this case, the boss ball 1 is rewritten as a ally ball, while the boss ball 7 is maintained without being rewritten as a ally ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), regarding the boss ball 7 to be rewritten, the boss ball 7 is maintained while the ally ball is inserted on the front side thereof. As a result, in the storage area "1" of the next game, the ally ball inserted in front of the boss ball 7 to be rewritten is stored, and in the storage area "2" of the next game, the boss ball 7 is maintained as it is. To be done. Then, the ally balls rewritten from the boss ball 1 are stored in the storage area "3" of the next game, and the storage areas "4" to "6" of the current game are stored in the storage areas "4" to "6" of the next game. A production ball having the same content as "6" is stored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), while the boss ball 7 is determined as the boss ball to be rewritten, the ally ball is inserted on the front side of the boss ball 7, so that the continuation of the battle ART is confirmed. However, the boss balls 7 and 8 may not be determined as the boss balls to be rewritten in the first place.

  It is disadvantageous for the player that the boss ball whose continuity is confirmed is rewritten as a friend ball, so by maintaining such a boss ball without rewriting, there is no dissatisfaction with the player, It is suitable. The effect ball stored in the storage area “6” is not set in the apocalypse and is not displayed, so even if it is a boss ball whose continuation is decided, it can be rewritten as a friend ball. Good. This is because such a non-displayed effect ball cannot be grasped by the player, so that the player will not be dissatisfied even if the boss ball whose continuation is decided is rewritten as a friend ball.

<Random lottery table with additional enemy power in Nakamura ART>
FIG. 110 is an enemies-determining ART middle ally power additional lottery table that is referred to when the HP of the ally character is added to the lottery performed when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball. The enemy determination ART middle team power addition lottery table defines the HP addition amount of the teammate character for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 110, it can be seen that the HP of the ally character increases when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse in the game this time, at “Bell winning” or more.

<Boss power lottery table during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 111 is an enemy determination ART mid-boss power lottery table that is referred to when determining the HP of the enemy character in the next game in which the enemy character of the opponent has been determined. The boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART defines the lottery value information for the HP of the enemy character for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 111, it can be seen that the HP of the enemy character is determined to be small when a rare combination other than the pure one is won. Note that the boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a common table for all enemy characters that are opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing a different table for each enemy character, it is possible to determine the HP according to the personality of the enemy character.

<Various data tables referenced during Battle ART>
Next, various data tables referred to in the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 121. Before describing these data tables, characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss status correspondence table>
FIG. 112 is a boss status correspondence table. Statuses such as offensive power, defensive power, and speed are set for the opponent characters boss 1 to boss 8, respectively. For example, boss 1 is an attack type, which has high attack power but slow speed. On the other hand, the boss 5 is a speed type and has a low attack power but a high speed. During the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed according to the characteristics of the enemy character.

  The bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters whose continuation of the ART game state is decided at the time when they are determined as the opponent. As described above, in the ART game state, if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, or even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the number of sets in the ART game state remains. If yes, continue. The mode in which the ART game state continues when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is arbitrary. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the HP of the enemy character is always 0 before the ally character. Alternatively, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the number of sets in the ART game state is always 1 or more (for example, the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters). In this case, the number of sets in the ART game state may be increased by 1, or even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the number of sets in the ART game state may not be subtracted). In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, by adding 1 to the set number of the ART game state, even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the ART game state is set. By making sure that the number of sets of No. 2 remains, the ART game state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are decided. Although detailed description is omitted, when the HPs of the bosses 7 and 8 can be set to 0 in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to a so-called additional specializing zone. The type of the additional specialization zone is arbitrary, but in the case of the present embodiment, as the additional specialization zone, it is conceivable to add the number of sets in the ART game state or add the HP of the teammate character.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
113 to 115 are battle MAP lottery tables for lottery of battle MAPs for determining effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character that is an opponent, and defines the lottery value information for the transition destination battle MAP for each transition source battle MAP. 113 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 1, FIG. 114 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 2, and FIG. 115 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to boss 5. As described below, the lottery value information defined in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
The battle MAP defines the battle MAP data for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined in each battle MAP.

<Dot lottery table during battle ART>
FIG. 117 shows a production ball lottery table during the battle ART for determining the production balls to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The in-battle production ball lottery table defines the lottery value information about the production balls to be set for each battle MAP data. In addition, in (A) of FIG. 117, the lottery value information for the effect balls is defined for the battle MAP data “0”, but a new boss is used rather than the lottery for the effect balls based on the MAP data “0”. It is not used when priority is given to MAP lottery.

  Referring to FIG. 117, the enemy sphere is easily drawn in the battle MAP data “1”, while the teammates and awakening balls are surely drawn in the battle MAP data “2” and “3”. Further, referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 116, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs form one set. Specifically, referring to the battle MAPs “1” to “7”, the battle MAP data continues to “2” and “3” after five “1” s, and the battle MAPs “8” to “14”, It can be seen that the same applies to the battle MAPs “15” to “21” and the battle MAPs “22” to “28”.

  The battle MAPs “4”, “11”, “18”, and “25” are battle MAPs that are not actually randomized (the random determination value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115). Therefore, in Pachi-slot 1, four battle MAPs (one is not lottery) for which the battle MAP data “1” where the enemy balls are easily drawn are defined, and battle MAP data “2” where the ally ball or the awakening ball is always lottery. A set of 6 with 2 battle MAPs for which "3" is specified is included.

  Here, the process returns to the battle MAP lottery table of FIGS. 113 to 115. In the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP data “2” and “3” in which the ally balls or the awakening balls are always lottered are defined. The battle MAP “6” “7” “13” “14” “20” “21” “ "27" and "28" are highlighted. When referring to the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP basically shifts to a battle MAP with a large numerical value one by one in the set, or the teammates or awakening balls in the set are always drawn. You can see that it will shift to Battle MAP. Specifically, from the battle MAP “1”, a battle MAP “2” having a larger numerical value or a battle MAP “6” in which a teammate or an awakening ball in the same set is surely drawn can be easily drawn. I understand.

  By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this way, in the pachi-slot 1, the number of consecutive attacks of the enemy character is limited to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). That is, when the transition of the battle MAP has been performed more than the predetermined number of times (five times in the present embodiment), the transition to the battle MAP in which the teammates or the awakening balls are always randomly selected is conducted at least once. It should be noted that although the battle MAP “1” is changed to the battle MAP “9” and the like, the battle MAP “9” and the like is the second number of battle MAPs in the same set, and therefore the battle MAP is changed When the number of times exceeds the predetermined number, the battle MAP in which the ally balls or the like are surely drawn is transferred at least once.

  Further, comparing the battle MAP lottery tables of FIGS. 113 to 115, it can be seen that the probability that the ally ball or the awakening ball will be transferred to the battle MAP that is always lottery differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. For example, when the attack type and slow boss 1 (see FIG. 112) is the enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table of FIG. 113, the battle MAP “6” and “7” in which the ally balls and the like are surely drawn are displayed. It can be seen that the transition is relatively easy. When the boss 2 with a normal defense and a normal speed (see FIG. 112) is the enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 114, a battle MAP in which a ally ball or the like is always lottery compared to the boss 1 is displayed. It turns out that it is difficult to move to 6 ”and“ 7 ”, and similarly, when the speed type boss 5 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, when the battle MAP lottery table of FIG. It can be seen that it is difficult to shift to the battle MAP “6” and “7” that are performed, and basically, the battle MAP “1” and the battle MAP having a larger numerical value are sequentially shifted.

  As described above, in the battle MAP lottery table, lottery value information is defined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, in the battle ART, the effect balls are set based on the speed set for the enemy character, the faster the enemy is, the more enemy balls are set, and the slower the speed is, the more friendly balls are set. Become.

<Damage lottery table during Battle ART>
118 and 119 are battle ART in-game damage lottery tables used when reducing HP of an enemy character or a teammate character in battle ART. In the battle ART damage damage lottery table, the types of enemy characters to be opponents, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse in this game, and the HP reduction amounts of enemy characters and ally characters for each internal winning combination are described. Specifies lottery value information.

  FIG. 118 is a damage lottery table during battle ART used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. In FIG. 118, in order to make it possible to compare the difference due to the status (attack power) of the enemy character, FIG. (A) of FIG. 118 shows a damage lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 112) having a low offensive power is an enemy character. Comparing the damage lottery tables during battle ART in FIG. 118, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, when the opponent is the boss 1, “15” is easily determined as the HP reduction amount of the teammate character. On the other hand, it can be seen that when the opponent is the boss 5, "5" is easily determined as the HP reduction amount of the teammate character.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 118, even if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if the winning combination is a rare role other than pure, then it is not the ally character but the enemy character. HP will be reduced. By configuring the damage lottery table during the battle ART in this way, the player can expect that the rare role will be determined as the internal winning role during the battle ART, and the interest during the ART can be increased. ..

  Further, FIG. 119 is a battle ART damage damage lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball or an awakening ball. In FIG. 119, in order to make it possible to compare the difference due to the status (defense) of the enemy character, FIG. 119 shows the battle ART damage lottery table used when the boss 1 (see FIG. 112) having high defense is an enemy character. 119 (B) of FIG. 119 shows a battle lot damage table during battle ART which is used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 112) having a low defense strength is an enemy character. Comparing the damage lottery table during battle ART in FIG. 119, when the opponent is the boss 1, it is easy to determine “5” as the HP reduction amount of the enemy character, while when the opponent is the boss 5, the enemy character is reduced. It can be seen that “10” or the like is easily determined as the HP reduction amount.

  In this way, by providing a damage lottery table during the battle ART according to the type of the enemy character serving as the opponent, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and various games during the battle ART can be performed. Can be converted.

<ART status lottery table>
120 and 121 are ART state lottery tables for lottery of a new ART state when it is decided to continue the ART in the battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines the type of opponent character of the opponent, the number of times the ART is continued, and the lottery value information for the destination ART state for each source ART state. 120 and 121 show the ART state lottery table that is referred to when the opponent character of the opponent is one of the bosses 1 to 6. If the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 1 to 6 and the ART state of the transition source is "31" to "33", the same ART state is determined as the ART state of the transition destination. On the other hand, if the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 7 and 8, and the transition source ART state is "31" to "33", a different ART state (for example, ART state "3", although not shown) , Etc.) will be determined as the destination ART state.

  Further, referring to FIGS. 120 and 121, it can be seen that when the number of times ART is continued exceeds 5, it is easy to shift to an ART state having a large numerical value.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using programs will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127.

[Main operation processing of pachi-slot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachi-slot 1 under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 122 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

  First, when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the main CPU 93 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally or the setting has been changed appropriately, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 64 are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop initialization processing (S6). In this processing, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S11.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs start command generation / storage processing (S7). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. It should be noted that the start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for producing an internal winning combination and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs wait processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 waits until the wait time elapses, when the elapsed time from the start of the previous game has not passed the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel rotation start processing (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the rotation start of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, the driving of the three stepping motors is controlled by the interrupt processing (see FIG. 127 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and the left side is controlled. The rotation of the reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start command generation and storage processing (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop control processing (S11). In this process, the reel stop control information determined in S6 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a prize search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 collates the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 20 to 32) with the symbol combination displayed on the pay line after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are all stopped. .. Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination (combination) defined by the symbol combination table is displayed on the pay line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal payout processing (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the credit number is updated based on the payout number of the symbol combination determined in S12, and the medals are paid out. Further, in this process, when the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is ON, the payout number is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes counting means, and updates (subtracts) the bonus end number counter based on the payout number determined according to the combination of symbols displayed in the bonus state. ..

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning operation command generation / storing process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and provides it in the main RAM 95 together with the additional data (the combination of the displayed symbols, the payout number and the value of the bonus end number counter). Saved in the communication data storage area. The winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes bonus end check processing (S15). In this processing, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the timing of ending the bonus game provided in the main RAM 95, and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to be ended. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process (S16). In this processing, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is started and whether or not the re-game is performed. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the RT gaming state based on the combination of the symbols displayed. The RT check process is a process for updating the RT gaming state in the bonus non-operating state, and is omitted in the bonus state and the inter-flag state. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S31). That is, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to grasp the current game state, and sets the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 33 to 37) according to the grasped game state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random value storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to obtain the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S33). The winning number is information assigned to each winning combination that may be randomly selected in the internal lottery table. For example, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which bonuses are not won, the winning number "1" is given to "outgoing" and the winning number "2" is given to "F_black-black-black". (See FIG. 33). When the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number "1" is given to "F_maintenance rep" and the winning number "2" is given to "F_123 rep". (See FIG. 35).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S34 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by 1.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S36). When it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S33 and repeats the processing from S33.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S34 again, in S34, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (YES), the main CPU 93 responds to the current winning number. , And a small win / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S38).

  Then, after the processing of S37 or S38, the main CPU 93 obtains the internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S40).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is "00000000" (S41). When the main CPU 93 determines in S41 that the data stored in the internal carryover combination storage area is not "00000000" (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S48 described below.

  On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S43).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination relating to BB is being carried over (S44). Referring to FIG. 60, the winning combination relating to BB is stored in any one of bits 2 to 7 of the internal carryover combination storing area 1 or bit 2 of the internal carryover combination storing area 2. Therefore, in this processing, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is stored in any of bits 2 to 7 of the internal carryover combination storing area 1 or bit 2 of the internal carryover combination storing area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines in S44 that the winning combination relating to BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S46.

  On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination relating to BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT5 gaming state flag to ON (S45), and then proceeds to the processing of S46. Specifically, "1" is set in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). By this process, when the winning combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state between the flags.

  Next, in the processing of S46, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination related to JACIN is being carried over. Referring to FIG. 60, the winning combination related to JACIN is stored in any one of bits 1 to 3 of the carryover combination storing area 2. Therefore, in this processing, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is stored in any of bits 1 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines in S46 that the winning combination related to JACIN is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the processing of S48.

  On the other hand, in S46, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state flag to ON (S47), and then proceeds to the process of S48. Specifically, "1" is set in bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). Since the winning combination related to JACIN may be determined as an internal winning combination only during the bonus state, this processing causes the winning combination to be determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state. The state can be shifted to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state.

  Next, in the process of S48, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 122).

[Bonus end check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the bonus end check processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and determines whether or not "BB" is in operation (S51). When the main CPU 93 determines in S51 that "BB" is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S51 that "BB" is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S52). ). In addition, when the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds 59 during the bonus state.

  In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and “RB”. It is determined whether or not is operating (S53). When the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that "RB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S56.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the RB end time process (S54). In this processing, the main CPU 93 clears the prize winning number counter and the game possible number counter, and turns off the game state flag (RB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "RB". Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 game state flag (S55).

  Next, in S56, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end time process. In this processing, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to "BB" in operation. As shown in S53 to S56, when the operation of the BB (bonus state) ends during the RB game state, the RT2 game state of the bonus non-winning state is shifted to after the BB ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the BB ends in a state other than the RB game state, the RT game state in the bonus state is maintained and the bonus non-winning state is entered.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end command generation / storage process (S57). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates data of the bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and a predetermined effect at the end of the bonus can be performed. After the processing of S57, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and refers to “RB It is determined whether or not is in operation (S58). When the main CPU 93 determines in S58 that "RB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S58, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the prize winning number counter or the game possible number counter is "0". (S59). In addition, when the possible winning number counter is "0", it means that a combination of symbols other than "off" is displayed eight times during the RB game state of the bonus state, and the possible game number counter is "0". In the case of, it means that the game has been played 12 times in the RB game state of the bonus state.

  In S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the number of possible wins counter nor the number of possible games play counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. (See 122)) and move to S16.

  On the other hand, in S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that either the prize winning number counter or the game possible number counter is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the RB end time process (S60). Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 game state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit state ending means, and the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" when the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is ON. By executing the process at the end of bonus with this as a trigger, the bonus end number counter is cleared and the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area corresponding to "BB" in operation is turned off.

[Bonus activation check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the bonus end check processing performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination relating to “BB” (see FIG. 38) is displayed (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to “BB” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs bonus operation time processing (S72). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON and sets the bonus end number counter to "59".

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT5 gaming status flag in the gaming status flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to OFF (S73). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus start command generation / storage process (S74). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and the main data together with the additional data (RT game state flag, the number of winning prizes, the number of possible games and the value of the bonus end number counter). The data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and a predetermined effect at the start of the bonus can be performed.

  When the process of S74 is finished, the main CPU 93 finishes the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to “BB” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 displays the symbol combination relating to “JACIN” (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not (S75). In S75, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the RB operation time process (S76). In this processing, the main CPU 93 sets the RB game state flag in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON, and also sets "8" to the possible winning number counter and "12" to the possible game number counter. ..

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT4 gaming status flag in the gaming status flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to OFF (S77). When the process of S77 ends, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to “JACIN” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the symbol combination relating to “replay” is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to "replay" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see Fig. 122). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S78 that the symbol combination relating to "replay" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S79). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the inserted number counter to the automatic inserted number counter. Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes profit state starting means, and when the symbol combination related to "BB" is displayed, the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is set to ON. , "59" is set in the bonus end number counter. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit control unit that executes the bonus end check process and the bonus operation check process.

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (S81). .. In S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is neither RT0 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, RT2 gaming state of bonus non-winning state, or RT4 gaming state of bonus non-winning state (NO), main The CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT0 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state (YES). ), The main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 shift lip" is displayed (S82). When the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT1 shift lip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that either "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 shift lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT game state flag which is currently on, and RT1 Turn on the gaming state. That is, in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, when the "bell spill" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed, the main CPU 93 Shifts the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S84). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes RT terminating means, and when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (high RT state), the "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1" at the time of the incorrect pushing order When "Transition Lip" is displayed, the RT4 game state is ended and the state is shifted to the RT1 game state (low RT state).

  When NO in S81 or S82, or following S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S91 described later.

  On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "RT4 shift rep" is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RT4 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT4 gaming state flag. That is, when the "RT4 transition rep" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. Thus, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT starting means, and when the "RT4 transition rep" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (high RT state). ..

  On the other hand, in S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RT4 shift lip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether "RT3 shift lip" is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT3 gaming state flag. That is, when the "RT3 transition rep" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S90).

  When NO in S85, S88, or following S87, S90, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (S91). ). In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is neither the RT1 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 93 finishes the RT check process and performs the main process. The process moves to S2 in the flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT1 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state is the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT game number counter ( 1 is subtracted) (S92). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). When the main CPU 93 determines in S93 that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT game state flag which is currently on (S94). By turning off the RT game state flag which is currently on by this processing, the game state shifts to the RT0 game state of the bonus non-winning state. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and moves the process to S2 in the main flow (see FIG. 122).

<Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S103). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of a predetermined timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S104). In this processing, mainly, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are appropriately transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a command transmitting unit and transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area in each process to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel control processing (S105). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all reels is requested, and thereafter, the respective reels rotate at a constant speed. Drives and controls three stepping motors. Further, when the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the pay line of the display window), and then the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lamp / 7-segment driving process (S106). In this processing, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 28 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S107). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 128 to 154.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 102 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 102 checks the sub RAM 103 and the like for errors and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, a sound control task, and a mother task which is a task group of VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization. Further, in this initialization processing, initialization or backup processing of effect balls according to the normal game state and the high probability game state stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 129 (S311). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, various lamp This is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 131 (S312). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the accessory control task shown in FIG. 132 (S313). In the accessory control task, the driving state of the rotary accessory 200 is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 133 (S313) and terminates the power-on process. The mother task is a VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization task group, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when one frame of image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. To use.

<Initialization or backup processing of production balls during normal game state and high probability game state>
Here, the initialization process or the backup process of the effect balls in the normal game state and the high probability game state, which is performed in the initialization process of S310, will be described.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 is composed of a DRAM as a work area and an SRAM for backup. The effect balls are basically stored in the DRAM, but are also stored in the SRAM for backup.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the pachi-slot 1, the power may be temporarily cut off during the operation of the game shop, or the power may be cut off when the game shop is closed. In the pachi-slot 1, in the power-on process performed when the power that is temporarily cut off is turned on, in the initialization process of S310, the effect balls stored in the SRAM are copied to the DRAM to back up the effect balls. The game situation is controlled so as not to change before and after the power is cut off. On the other hand, in the power-on process that is performed when the power is turned on for more than one business day, newly drawn lottery balls are stored in the DRAM without restoring the backup data in the initialization process of S310.

  Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 detects that the power supply device 44 is powered on by a power-on detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub-control board 42, and also turns on the power. The date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) at which is detected is acquired from the RTC (real time clock: not shown) arranged in the sub control circuit 101. Then, the sub control circuit 101 restores or initializes the backup data of the effect ball based on the date and time when the power-on is detected. That is, in the present embodiment, the power-on detection circuit arranged on the sub-control board 42 constitutes a power-on detection means.

  In addition, the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 detects that the power supply is cut off in the power supply device 44 by the power cutoff detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub control board 42, and the sub control circuit 101 The date and time are obtained from the RTC arranged in the sub RAM 103 and stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) (power interruption process). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 acquires the date and time from the RTC when detecting the power-on, and compares the acquired date and time with the date and time when it is detected that the power stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) is cut off. Gets the power interruption period that indicates the time the power was off. That is, in the present embodiment, the power interruption detecting circuit arranged on the sub control board 42 constitutes a power interruption detecting means, and the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an obtaining means for obtaining the electricity interruption period. In the game in which the effect balls are set in the apocalypse as described above, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, “bell winning” or higher) is displayed, the probability according to the type of the effect balls that is set. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a privilege granting means in order to carry out the transition lottery of CZ and ART and various kinds of additional lottery during ART (see FIG. 102 described above).

  Here, when the power is turned off at the end of business and turned on at the start of business, the power interruption period is several hours or more. On the other hand, when the power supply is temporarily cut off, this power-off period is long and only a few minutes. Therefore, when the power interruption period is a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours) or more, the sub control circuit 101 discards the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) for backup and newly adds 6 Re-lottery of production balls for each production (production ball lottery during apocalypse operation, production ball lottery during CZ, production ball lottery during enemy determination ART, production ball lottery during battle ART), and sub RAM103 (DRAM). Remember. On the contrary, when the power-off period is less than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 copies the six effect balls stored in the SRAM for backup to the DRAM (restores the backup data). The effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 before the power is turned off are maintained even after the power is turned on.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the backup data of the effect balls can be restored or initialized only from the time when the power-on is detected instead of the power interruption period. Since the business hours of the game shop are often set in advance, the time when the power of the game machine such as the pachi-slot 1 is turned on at the game shop is generally fixed. Therefore, in the sub-control circuit 101, when the power-on detection time is a predetermined time (for example, a time between 7:00 am and 9:00 am), the power is turned on with the start of business. Therefore, the effect balls are initialized. On the contrary, when the power-on is detected at a time other than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the power is temporarily cut off and restores the backup data of the effect ball.

  Further, in recent gaming machines such as the pachi-slot 1, a gaming machine having an RTC function for performing a predetermined operation according to time is also known. In the case of such a gaming machine, the backup data of the effect ball can be restored or initialized based on the current time, not limited to the timing when the power is turned on. Specifically, when the current time is the time immediately before the opening of the game shop (for example, 9:50 am), the effect balls are initialized. On the contrary, if the current time is other than the time immediately before the opening of the game store, the backup data of the effect ball is restored when the power-on is detected.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task started in S311 of the power-on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S320). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp-related data initialization process (S321).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes waiting for a timer interrupt (S322). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 102 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  An example of a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Further, a task group (not shown) for power interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for communication with the door monitoring unit, and the like can be given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a ramp data analysis process (S323) and then performs a ramp execution process (S324). For example, the sub CPU 102 displays the image corresponding to the latent image 402 on the display device 10 by controlling the light emission of the LED 403 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data. In addition, for example, the sub CPU 102 notifies the result of promotion lottery of the non-displayed effect balls by controlling the LEDs provided on the rotary accessory 200 according to the registered effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a non-effect image such as a menu screen or an error screen that is not related to the effect (S325). If it is determined that the non-effect image is not called (NO), the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, when it is determined that the non-effect image is called (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the panel is being displayed (S326). It should be noted that “during panel display” means that the LED 403 of the panel device 400 is emitting light and an image corresponding to the latent image 402 is being displayed. If it is determined that the panel is not being displayed (NO), the process proceeds to S322.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the panel is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently turns off the LED for panel display, that is, the LED 403 of the panel device 400, and interrupts the panel display (S327). Then, the process proceeds to S322. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 controls the light emission of the LEDs 403 of the panel device 400, the LED group 25, and the LEDs provided on the rotary accessory 200 according to the registered effect data. Make up.

  Here, since the non-effect images such as the menu screen and the error screen are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 provided behind the panel device 400, if the non-effect images are displayed during the panel display, the non-effect images are not displayed. The visibility is reduced. In this respect, the pachi-slot 1 prevents the visibility of the non-effect image from being lowered by turning off the LED 403 of the panel device 400 when a request for calling the non-effect image is made during the panel display. Hereinafter, a specific control when the non-effect image is called during the panel display will be described.

<Display method of non-effects image during panel display>
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an outline of a method of displaying a non-effect image during panel display.

  In FIG. 130, time t1 is the timing when the effect data for panel display is read. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 makes an output request for making the LED 403 emit light to the panel control board 79 based on the effect data. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the LED 403 is turned on from time t1.

  Further, time t2 is the timing at which the call request for the non-effect image is detected. It should be noted that the non-production image call request can be detected by an arbitrary method. For example, a request for calling an error screen indicating that the front door 2b is opened can be detected by receiving a signal for displaying an error from the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74. In addition, the request for calling the menu screen is made by performing a predetermined operation (menu activation) by monitoring the operation status of various operation buttons (selection button 18, decision button 19, etc.) provided on the pedestal portion 12. Can be detected by detecting.

  At time t2, when a request for calling the non-effect image is detected, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect data for displaying the non-effect image and issues an output request for displaying the non-effect image on the liquid crystal relay board 77. To do. The liquid crystal relay board 77 displays a non-effect image on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to the output request. On the other hand, when the panel control board 79 detects the non-production image call request, the non-production image call request is given priority over the output request of the LED 403 received from time t1, and the LED 403 is turned off. At this time, as shown in FIG. 130A, the sub CPU 102 continues to execute the effect data for panel display. That is, in the pachi-slot 1, the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally, but the light emission of the LED 403 is stopped by suppressing the output port.

  As a result, as shown at time t2 in FIG. 130 (b), a non-effect image such as a menu screen is displayed on the display device 10. At this time, since the LED 403 is off, the non-effect image is not covered with the display by the panel device 400, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  Further, time t3 is the timing at which the end request for the non-effect image is detected. It should be noted that the detection of the non-effect image end request can be performed by an arbitrary method. For example, a request to end the error screen indicating that the front door 2b is opened can be detected by receiving a signal that the door is closed from the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74. The request for ending the menu screen is made by monitoring the operation status of various operation buttons (selection button 18, decision button 19, etc.) provided on the pedestal portion 12, and performing a predetermined operation (end of menu). Can be detected by detecting.

  When the end request for the non-effect image is detected at time t3, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for displaying the non-effect image. As a result, the non-effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 disappears. On the other hand, the panel control board 79, which has stopped emitting light from the LED 403 from time t2, restarts emitting light from the LED 403 in response to the output request from the LED 403 received from time t1. As a result, as shown at time t3 in FIG. 130 (b), an image corresponding to the panel device 400 is displayed on the display device 10.

  Further, time t4 is the timing when the execution of the effect for panel display is completed. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for panel display, and ends the output request to the panel control board 79 for causing the LED 403 to emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the LED 403 is turned off, and as shown at time t4 in FIG. 130 (b), the display of the image corresponding to the panel device 400 on the display device 10 ends. ..

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1, when the non-effect image is called during the panel display effect, the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed to prevent the non-effect image from being covered by the panel display effect. Since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and no processing such as error processing is added to the execution process of the effect data itself, the pachi-slot 1 can simplify the process at the time of calling the non-effect image and also cause a bug. Can be reduced.

  Note that the condition for restarting the lighting of the LED 403 after turning off the LED 403 in response to the detection of the non-production image call request is arbitrary. That is, in the above description, the lighting of the LED 403 is restarted on the condition that the non-effect image end request is detected. However, for example, a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the non-effect image calling request was detected. The LED 403 may be turned on again. Thereby, the effect produced by the panel device 400 can be promptly restarted.

  Further, when the non-effect image calling request is detected, all the LEDs 403 may be turned off, or only a part of the LEDs 403 may be turned off. Since the non-effect image such as the menu screen is displayed at a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 11, the visibility of the non-effect image is displayed at a position which does not overlap with the non-effect image even if the display for the panel effect is performed. Does not spoil. As described above, since the LED 403 is an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are linearly arranged, the non-effect image is avoided by controlling the LEDs to be turned on / off according to the position where the non-effect image is displayed. It is possible to display for panel production. For example, when the non-effect image is displayed in a substantially rectangular area in the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, the central LED of the LED array is turned off while the LEDs at both ends are turned on to display the non-effect image. It is possible to avoid the display for the panel effect.

  Therefore, when there is a request for calling the non-effect image, the sub CPU 102 specifies an area in which the LED 403 is turned off according to the type of the non-effect image for which the call is requested. Then, for the area specified by the sub CPU 102, the panel control board 79 gives priority to the non-effect image call request over the output request of the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display, and turns off the LED 403, except for this area. With respect to the area, the LED 403 may be output in response to the output request of the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display.

  Thereby, it is possible to display the non-effect image while continuing the panel display effect by the panel device 400. In this case, it is preferable that the panel display effect can be continued in a wider area by specifying the area where the LED 403 is turned off according to the type of the non-effect image.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the sound control task activated in S312 of the power-on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound data analysis process (S331), a sound effect execution process (S332), and executes the process of S331. In the sound effect execution process of S332, various sounds corresponding to the game are output, but an example thereof is shown below.

<Sound effect execution processing during ART continuation>
In Pachi-slot 1, since the continuation of ART is controlled based on the win or loss during the battle ART, it is basically unknown whether or not the ART will continue until the battle ART ends (until the victory or loss is decided). However, if there are multiple sets of ART (see FIG. 71 etc.), even if the player loses the battle ART, the ART will continue, and if the boss 7, 8 is determined as the opponent of the battle ART. However, since ART will continue, ART continuation may be confirmed before the battle ART ends.

  The pachi-slot 1 may notify the player in advance that the ART currently being executed will continue by performing a predetermined sound effect execution process when the continuation of the ART is confirmed. Specifically, the pachi-slot 1 outputs the first sound continuously output during the ART, the second sound continuously output during the ART, and the instantaneous sound output during the ART as sounds during the ART. And a third sound that is played. The first sound is a dedicated song in the ART that is output regardless of whether the ART continues, and the second sound is another dedicated song in the ART that is output only when the ART continues. The third sound is a sound effect (siren) that is output only when ART continues.

  As a method of notifying the player that the ART is continued by the sound effect execution processing, for example, changing the music in the ART from the first sound to the second sound in the middle of the ART, and from the start of the ART Various modes are conceivable, such as making the music in the ART the second sound, and outputting the third sound at the start or in the middle of the ART. In this case, when the first sound is changed to the second sound, the player may not be able to recognize that the music has changed depending on the connection of the music, and the second sound is output from the start of ART. Therefore, an unfamiliar player may not be able to grasp whether the song is output when the ART continuation is confirmed.

  Therefore, the pachi-slot 1 outputs a sound effect such as the third sound before outputting the second sound so that the player can easily recognize that the ART continues.

<Role control task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the accessory control task started in S313 of the power-on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of accessory-related data relating to the driving state of the rotary accessory 200 (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a character data analysis process (S341), a character effect execution process (S342), and the process of S341. In addition, in the accessory production execution process of S342, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes according to the game, an example of which is shown below.

<Accessory control during promotion lottery>
As described above, in the pachi-slot 1, the cover member 198 of the rotary accessory 200 is opened to allow the player to visually recognize the eyeball main body 203 when the promotion lottery of the non-display effect balls is performed. Specifically, when the lottery using the movable accessory lottery table shown in FIG. 85 is won, the sub CPU 102 sets the accessory data for opening the cover member 198. When the sub CPU 102 controls the rotary accessory 200 based on the accessory data, the player can visually recognize the eyeball main body 203 when performing the lottery for promoting the effect balls.

<Control of accessories during ART>
In the pachi-slot 1, during the ART, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes, and the rotating accessory 200 is used to express that the current game state is a special game state. For example, the cover member 198 of the rotary accessory 200 is opened and closed to drive the rotary accessory 200 so that the highlight accessory blinks, or the cover of the rotary accessory 200 is interlocked with the start operation of the start lever 16. By making the member 198 half open and exposing the eyeball member 205 only half, or by moving the eyeball member 205 to the left and right while the cover member 198 is open, the eyeball accessory looks around. The rotating accessory 200 is driven. In this way, in the pachi-slot 1, the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 moves to a predetermined position during the ART, and a special effect is provided, thereby enlivening the game during the ART.

  Here, depending on the player, the game may be interrupted in order to temporarily leave the seat during ART, or to operate the mobile terminal or the like (smartphone or mobile phone) after operating the start lever 16. The rotating accessory 200 is continuously driven and the cover member 198 is maintained in a semi-open state until the player is present or the game is interrupted even if the player is present. Then, the motor 214 (see FIG. 7) for driving the rotary accessory 200 and the motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 are consumed, leading to a failure. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the player leaves the seat or interrupts the game during the ART, the driving of the motor related to the rotary accessory 200 is stopped and the predetermined position (for example, the cover member 198 is By returning the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 to the initial position (for example, the position where the cover member 198 covers the eyeball member 205 (so-called eye closed state)), the rotary accessory 200 is rotated. It reduces the consumption of the motor according to the present invention. When the cover member 198 is in the semi-open state, a motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 needs to continue to excite the motor in order to keep the cover member 198 in the semi-open state. The motor (not shown) is consumed.

  It should be noted that the method of detecting the player leaving the seat or the interruption of the game is arbitrary, but in the pachi-slot 1, for example, during the ART (more specifically, when the rotating accessory 200 during the ART is being driven, or , When the cover member 198 is in a semi-open state), a non-operation time indicating a period during which the player's operation is not accepted is measured, and when the non-operation time exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), The player may leave the seat or interrupt the game. That is, when a player is playing a game, some operation such as an operation (for example, a start operation or a stop operation) associated with the game or an operation of a menu screen is performed, and thus the operation of the player is not performed for a predetermined time. First, it is determined that the player has left the seat or interrupted the game.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 moves the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 from the initial position to a predetermined position until the no-operation time reaches a predetermined time during the ART, thereby performing a unique effect during the ART, and the ART is performed. When the no-operation time reaches a predetermined time, the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 is returned to the initial position to reduce unnecessary wear. After that, when the player performs some operation, the no-operation time is cleared, so that the sub CPU 102 moves the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 from the initial position to a predetermined position to give a special effect during the ART. To do. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a time measuring means and measures a non-operation time during which no game operation is performed when the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 is at a predetermined position.

  It should be noted that the player may have the impression that the ART has ended because the effect of the rotating accessory 200 has ended when the player returns from the seat or resumes the game. is there. Therefore, when the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 is returned to the initial position, the sub CPU 102 continues to notify that it is in the ART state by emitting light from the LED, displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11, and sounding the speakers 23L and 23R. It may be that. Compared with a member that is physically consumed like the movable part of the rotary accessory 200, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the pachi-slot 1 will break down even if it is continuously executed while leaving the seat. When the player does not perform any operation, from the viewpoint of energy saving, the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is suppressed, for example, by displaying a demo screen, and output from the speakers 23L and 23R in order to suppress the volume leaking to the surroundings. It is common practice to suppress the sound played. Therefore, it is more preferable to control the light emission of the LED rather than the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R as a method of continuing to inform that the ART is in progress.

<Mother task>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the mother task activated in S314 of the power-on processing shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the main task started in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes VSYNC interrupt initialization processing (S360) and waits for VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes drawing processing (S362), and executes processing of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task activated in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

  First, the sub CPU 102 initializes the communication message queue (S370), and checks the received command (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous command is received (S372). Here, when it is determined that the command different from the previous command is not received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the command different from the previous command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 checks the order of the command received this time and the command received last time (S373), and the order of the commands is normal. It is determined whether or not (S374). In a gaming machine such as the pachi-slot 1, insertion of medals, start of reel rotation (operation of the start lever 16), reel stop associated with the first stop operation to the third stop operation (operation of stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), reel Since the game is performed in the order of determining the combination of the displayed symbols after the stop and giving the profit according to the symbol combination, the order of the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is also determined. The processes of S373 and S374 are processes for determining whether or not the commands have been received in a predetermined order. If the received command is a command that is not related to the progress of the game, the sub CPU 102 does not determine the order of the commands.

  In the process of S374, if it is determined that the order of the commands is abnormal (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets a sequence error (S375). Here, the sequence error is an error detected when the sub control circuit 101 receives various commands from the main control circuit 91 and receives commands in an order that cannot occur in a normal game. For example, a case where the sub control circuit 101 receives a start command without receiving a winning operation command after receiving a reel stop command corresponds to a sequence error. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a game order determination means and determines whether or not various commands received from the main control circuit 91 are in a predetermined order, so that the progress order of one game is predetermined. It is determined whether the steps have been performed in the order of. The predetermined order of the commands in this embodiment is the order of the start command, the reel rotation start command, the reel stop command, the reel stop command, the reel stop command, and the winning operation command. Although the command is related to the progress of the game, it is excluded from the determination of the order of commands because it is not a command that always occurs in one game.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the CZ end determination or the like is performed according to the combination of the displayed symbols, and when the winning operation command cannot be received on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, the expected game A game different from the flow will be played. For example, if the bell crease is displayed in the CZ, the CZ is terminated on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, but if the winning operation command cannot be received, it can be understood that the bell crease has been displayed. Instead, the CZ may continue. In such a case, since the start command in the next game is received without receiving the winning operation command in the current game, by monitoring the occurrence of a sequence error, the expected game It is possible to prevent a game different from the flow from being played.

  In the process of S374, if it is determined that the order of the commands is normal (YES), or following the process of S375, the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command, and the created game information is stored in the sub RAM 103. It is stored (S376). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 136 (S377) and executes the process of S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the command analysis processing executed in S377 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 138 (S380), lamp data determination processing (S381), sound data determination processing (S382), and accessory data determination processing. Then, (S383), each determined data is registered (S384), and the command analysis process ends.

  In the effect content determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 selects a predetermined game from among a plurality of effects including a layer switching type effect and an effect switching type effect which will be described later and can be switched from the pre-switching effect to the post-switching effect in accordance with the progress of the game. At, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is selected. Further, in the sound data determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data for determining the content of the sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R according to the game, and in the accessory data determination process, the sub CPU 102 responds to the game. The accessory data for driving the rotary accessory 200 is determined.

<Anime task>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the animation task started in step S352 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes object control processing (S391). Specifically, when the check result that the game information is changed is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change of the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a request for switching the effect (S392). Here, the effect switching request is predetermined for each effect that is being executed, and, for example, the start operation and the start of rotation of each reel associated with the start operation, and each of the first stop operation to the third stop operation. This is performed when the reel is stopped or when a predetermined operation button is operated. Such an effect switching request can be acquired based on a command (start command, reel rotation start command, reel stop command, winning operation command, etc.) received from the main control circuit 91. In the process of S392, when it is determined that the effect switching request has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the process of S396.

  On the other hand, when determining in the process of S392 that the effect switching request has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect after switching is a layer switching effect ( S393). When it is determined in this process that the effect after switching is the layer switching effect (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines that the effect after switching the image layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (layer switching effect). The layer is switched to the designated layer (S394), and the process proceeds to S396. On the other hand, when it is determined in S393 that the effect after switching is not the layer switching effect (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the effect to be executed in the image layer currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is switched to the effect after switching (S395), and the process proceeds to S396.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes an animation task management process (S396). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. After executing the anime task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S390.

<Specific processing when switching production>
Here, a method of switching the effect when there is a request to switch the effect will be specifically described. In the pachi-slot 1, the progress of the production is interlocked with the operation of the player by switching the production with the progress of the game such as a stop operation or the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button). .. In the pachi-slot 1, the effect in the pachi-slot 1 is switched in advance by switching the layer in which the effect is being executed, and by switching the effect of the layer switching type in which the effect is switched according to the progress of the game and the effect executed in the same layer The effect is classified into effect-switching type effects that are switched according to the progress of.

  Then, in the pachi-slot 1, when the effect switching request is made, the effect switching is controlled based on the relationship between the effect currently being executed and the effect after the switching. Specifically, in the case of a layer switching type effect, the effect after switching is executed in a layer different from the layer that is performing the effect before switching, and the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is changed. By doing, the production is switched. That is, in the work area of the drawing RAM 105, the first layer in which the image data indicating the effect image according to the effect before the switching is set and the image layer indicating the effect image in accordance with the effect after the switching are set. Two layers are stored and the effect is switched by switching the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the first layer to the second layer.

  Further, in the case of the effect switching type effect, in the layer for executing the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, by changing the effect to be executed from the effect before switching to the effect after switching, the effect is changed. Switch. That is, the effect is changed by changing the image data set in the layer stored in the work area of the drawing RAM 105 from the image data showing the effect image according to the effect before switching to the effect image according to the effect after switching. Switch.

  The layer switching type effect can reduce the occurrence of flickering due to the time lag that occurs when switching images before and after switching, but since multiple layers are used at the same time, the processing load of image processing is reduced. Is increased and the capacity of the drawing RAM 105 is pressed. On the other hand, since the effect switching type effect uses only one layer, the processing load can be suppressed, but on the other hand, flicker may occur due to a time lag that occurs at the time of image switching before and after the switching.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the relationship between the effect before the switching and the effect after the switching is determined in advance according to the connection of the effects before and after the switching, the processing load of each effect, and the like. For example, an effect that tends to cause flickering before and after switching and which gives an unpleasant feeling to the player is defined as a layer switching type effect, and an effect that does not cause flicker is defined as an effect switching type effect. deep. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to flicker at the time of switching the effects, and also to prevent processing from being dropped due to the switching of the effects.

  Note that the predetermined content (layer switching type effect or effect switching type effect) for each effect may be changed according to the continuation status of the game. For example, a player whose eyes are tired due to an increase in playing time becomes more uncomfortable due to the flicker of the image. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 in which the player who has played a lot of game time is playing, even an effect that is predetermined as an effect switching type effect may be changed to a layer switching type effect.

  The game time can be acquired by any method. For example, the operating time of the pachi-slot 1 may be acquired as the game time, and the time during which the player who has performed user registration in the pachi-slot 1 plays the game may be acquired as the game time.

<Switching production when operating the chance button>
In a gaming machine such as the pachi-slot 1, the player may be prompted to perform an operation unrelated to the progress of the game, such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the operation is performed. Also in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the button operation is urged to the player. For example, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the chance button on the liquid crystal display device 11 while all reels are rotating. The display prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation (press the chance button). Based on the command received from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 detects that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the main control circuit 91 sends a reel stop command or the like before the predetermined operation is detected. By receiving, it is detected that the game has progressed without performing a predetermined operation.

  Then, in the pachi-slot 1, the effect to be switched is made different depending on whether the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed or when the game progresses without performing the predetermined operation. Specifically, when the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed, the first switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the pre-switch effect to the first effect. Switch to production after switching. Further, when the game progresses without performing a predetermined operation, the second switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching to the effect after second switching. Switch to.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1, since the effects to be switched can be made different depending on whether the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed or not, the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. .. Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Production content determination processing>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the effect contents determination process executed in S380 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 136.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a start command has been received (S401). Here, when it is determined that the start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139 (S402), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S403). If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes reel rotation start command reception processing (S404), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S405). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel stop command reception process (S406), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S407). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command is received (YES), the sub CPU102 executes the winning operation command reception process shown in FIG. 149 (S408), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process for receiving the winning operation command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S409). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus end command reception process shown in FIG. 154 (S410), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command receiving process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S411). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus start command reception time process (S412), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command receiving process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the bonus start command reception process, the BB mode “0” is set as the initial value of the BB mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus end command is not received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a process according to the other received command (S413), and ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when a start command is received>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the start command reception process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S421). When it is determined in S421 that the game state is either the normal game state or the high-probability game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal start CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 140 (S422). In the normal start CZ / ART lottery, the above-described transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of start is performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the game this time.

  Subsequent to the processing of S422, the sub CPU 102 performs the apocalypse operation processing shown in FIG. 141 (S423). In this apocalypse operation processing, the sub CPU 102 performs control for starting or ending the operation of the apocalypse.

  Subsequent to the processing of S423, or when it is determined in S421 that the game state is neither the normal game state nor the high-probability game state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the RT4 game state in which the game state is the normal game state. It is determined whether or not there is (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state managed by the sub side is the normal gaming state, and the RT gaming state managed by the main side is the RT4 gaming state. When it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability gaming state transition processing shown in FIG. 142 (S425). In this probability game state transition processing, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery of avoidance points in order to shift the game state from the normal game state to the high probability game state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S425, or if it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. Yes (S426). When it is determined in S426 that the game state is the high-probability game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability middle effect registration process shown in FIG. 143 (S427). In this high-probability medium effect registration processing, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect (push order navigation) for avoiding the main-side game state from shifting from the RT4 game state to the RT1 game state based on the avoidance point. ..

  Subsequent to the processing of S427 or in S426, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is CZ (S428). When it is determined in S428 that the game state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs CZ start ART lottery processing shown in FIG. 144 (S429). In the CZ start ART lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-mentioned transfer lottery (C) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S429 or in S428, if it is determined that the game state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the game state is the bonus state (during BB) (S430). ). When it is determined in S430 that the game state is the bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the BB ART lottery process shown in FIG. 145 (S431). In this BB ART lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-mentioned transfer lottery (F) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S431 or in S430, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is the ART gaming state (during ART). (S432). When it is determined in S432 that the game state is the ART game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the ART process shown in FIG. 146 (S433). In the processing during ART, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of effects in the enemy determination ART and the battle ART.

  In S432, if it is determined that the game state is not the ART game state (NO), or following the process of S433, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a sequence error is set (S434). Here, the sequence error is set when the order of the commands is not normal in the main board communication task. If it is determined in S434 that the sequence error has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a sequence error time process, which will be described later (S435), and ends the start command reception time process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S434 that the sequence error is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process.

<Specific example 1 of sequence error processing>
In the present embodiment, the CZ ends on the condition that a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the pressing order is displayed in the game in which the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination. To do. Since the CZ is managed by the sub control circuit 101 and the combination of displayed symbols is managed by the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) transmits from the main control circuit 91. The end / continuation of the CZ will be controlled based on the winning operation command. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 ends the CZ when it receives a winning operation command indicating that the combination of the displayed symbols is "bell-shaped eyes" (see FIG. 153 described later).

  Here, when the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, so that a game different from the expected flow of the game is played. Will be done. For example, when "bell spilled eyes" is displayed in the CZ, the CZ is terminated on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, but when the winning operation command cannot be received, "bell spilled eyes" is displayed. This cannot be grasped by the sub control circuit 101 side, and there is a risk that CZ will continue.

  Here, the sequence error may occur due to a failure of the pachi-slot 1 or the like irrespective of the operation of the player, but temporarily disconnects the communication between the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101. It may be artificially generated by a fraudulent act such as so-called command zeroing that causes a communication disconnection state. If such a fraudulent act makes it possible to avoid the end of the CZ, the player who has committed the fraudulent act will get an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91 and terminates CZ assuming that a sequence error has occurred when the order of the commands is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage due to an illegal act.

<Specific example 2 of sequence error processing>
In the present embodiment, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side may be treated as the high-probability gaming state on the sub side. This high-probability game state ends at the timing when the sub side recognizes that the push order bell or the push order lip has displayed the combination of symbols displayed at the time of an incorrect answer (see FIG. 152 described later). Therefore, when the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the symbols displayed, and a game different from the expected game flow is performed. You will be destroyed. For example, when "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed during the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is ended on the sub-control circuit 101 side, but when the winning operation command cannot be received. On the sub control circuit 101 side, it is not possible to understand that "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed, and there is a possibility that the high-probability gaming state continues.

  Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, determines that a sequence error has occurred when the order of the commands is abnormal, and terminates the high-probability game state to end the normal game state. Move to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage due to an illegal act.

  When a sequence error occurs, the history of sequence errors that have occurred may be accumulated. It is difficult to determine whether the sequence error that has occurred is one that has been artificially caused by a fraudulent act, or that has occurred regardless of the player's operation due to a failure of the pachi-slot 1, etc. By accumulating error occurrence history, it is possible to grasp the tendency of fraudulent activities (goto). For example, a sequence error caused by cheating is likely to occur when it causes an advantageous situation for the player, and a sequence error that occurs naturally regardless of the player occurs regardless of the situation. Therefore, when a sequence error occurs due to an illegal act, a similar history is accumulated as a sequence error occurrence history. Therefore, it is possible to receive a specific command in a specific game state by making it possible to grasp the game state in which the sequence error has occurred and the type of command that could not be received on the side of the sub-control circuit 101 from the tendency of the sequence error occurrence history By disabling this, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the player is unfairly profitable, and this can be useful for the design of future gaming machines.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal start>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the normal start CZ / ART lottery processing executed in S422 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the internal lottery combination and the effect balls set in the apocalypse in this game, and refers to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 73 to shift to the CZ / ART lottery. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won in this lottery (S442). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ to the game state of the next game (S443), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal start.

  On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won in the lottery in S441 (S444). If the player has not won the ART (NO), the normal start CZ / ART lottery process ends, while if the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state is the ART game state. The enemy determination ART is set (S445). Since the ART game state is the RT4 game state on the main side, the RT4 transition lip is displayed and the main side must shift to the RT4 game state. Therefore, "to set the enemy decision ART in the ART game state as the game state" does not mean that the game state of the next game becomes the enemy decision ART in the ART game state, but the RT4 game state on the main side. It means that the game state of the sub side becomes the enemy determining ART of the ART game state when the process shifts to. This also applies to the following.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to randomly draw the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S446). Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal start CZ / ART lottery process.

<Apocalypse operation processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the apocalypse actuation process executed in S423 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S457.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse actuation random determination table of FIG. 79 (C), the amount of addition or subtraction of the guaranteed number of times is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S452 (S453).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S454). When it is determined that the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 lottery the effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the processing of S462. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly draws the apocalypse MAP and randomly draws the effect balls based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 80 to 83). In addition, in this process, the sub CPU 102 upgrades the effect balls set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability when the promotion lottery is possible (when the guaranteed number of movable role objects is 1 or more).

  On the other hand, when determining that the guaranteed number of times is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 updates the apocalypse flag to off, ends the operation of the apocalypse (S456), and then shifts to the processing of S462.

  If it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse actuation lottery table of FIGS. 79 (A) and (B), the amount of addition of the guaranteed number is randomly drawn based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S459). When it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts the apocalypse operation (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 in the apocalypse (S461).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 carries out a lottery for shifting to the winning mode based on the internal winning combination (S462). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly refers to the winning mode of the transfer destination by referring to the mode transfer lottery tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 78. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result as the winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse operation process.

<High probability game state transition processing>
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the high-probability game state transition processing executed in S425 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 lots the avoidance points based on the internal winning combination (S465). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly refers to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. 89 to randomly add the avoidance points. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery of the avoidance points is won, that is, whether or not the avoidance points are added by 1 or more (S466). When the winning is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S467), and ends the high-probability game state transition processing. On the other hand, if not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability gaming state transition processing.

<High probability medium performance registration processing>
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the high-probability middle effect registration process executed in S427 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pushing order bell or the pushing order lip is determined as an internal winning combination (S471). If it is determined that neither the push order bell nor the push order lip has been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability middle effect registration processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell or the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). When it is determined that the avoidance points are not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability middle effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation data that is the correct answer in the pressing order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the avoidance point (S474), and ends the high-probability middle effect registration process.

  In this way, in the high probability game state, when the push order bell or the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified based on the avoidance point. For the player, by playing the game according to the notification, the high-probability game state can be continued, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Here, the high-probability game state is easier to win the transition lottery to the ART than the normal game state, and when the correct answer push order is notified in the high-probability game state, the player is in the high-probability game state. The benefit of continuing is already granted. Therefore, when the correct answer pushing order is notified in the high probability game state, the lottery result of the transition lottery in the game may be discarded (invalid). This can prevent the player's profit from becoming excessive.

<ART lottery process at CZ start>
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the CZ start ART lottery processing executed in S429 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 updates the number of CZ continuous games (S481). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the first game of CZ (S482). When it is determined that it is the first game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently lots and sets CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 91, and randomly selects and sets the CZ_MAP used in the CZ (S483).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG. 93A to determine and set the initial value of the invalid point.

  After S484 or when it is determined in S482 that the game is not the first CZ game (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently lots the effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ in-game effect lottery table shown in FIG. 94, and randomly selects and sets the effect balls based on the final effect ball currently set. Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the developed ball set in the apocalypse to the avoidance ball when the invalid point is 1 or more.

  It is determined whether or not it is the 30th game of CZ (S486). When it is determined that it is the 30th game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to randomly draw and set the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 (S488). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at CZ start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the 30th game of CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 will randomly draw and add invalid points based on the internal winning combination (S489). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly refers to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIGS. 93B and 93C, and randomly adds the invalid point, and adds it to the invalid point currently held.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a development ball and the push-order bell is determined as an internal winning combination (S490). When all the conditions are satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of invalid points is 1 or more (S491). If it is determined that the number of invalid points is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid points (S492), and sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S493).

  This effect data gives, for example, an effect that informs or suggests that the current CZ mode is 1 or that the CZ mode will increase from 0 to 1 in the game within a few times (for example, a few times). Is production data for. Specifically, the effect data that the probability of being set is different depending on whether the CZ mode is 1 or 0, or when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a predetermined number of times of the game and when the CZ mode is within the predetermined number of times. In the game, the effect data is different in the probability that it is set when it does not rise from 0 to 1. This enables the player to guess or grasp the current CZ mode when the number of invalid points is 1 or more.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S491 that the number of invalid points is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ in-art ART lottery table shown in FIG. 95, and moves to the ART lottery (C) based on the current CZ mode. ) Is performed, and the lottery flag is set to ON (S494). As described above, during the CZ, if the development ball is set and if the push order bell is won, the transition lottery (C) is performed, but if the correct answer is obtained in the push order when stopped, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes invalid. To be done. The lottery completion flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result when stopped. When the process of S494 ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ start ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if any of the conditions is not satisfied in S490 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an avoidance ball ( S495). When it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the avoidance ball (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for present CZ mode notification (S496), and CZ start ART lottery processing. To finish. Further, in S495, when it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not the avoidance ball (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ start ART lottery process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the advantageous state lottery means, and shifts to the ART based on the CZ mode performed in the middle of CZ, or shifts to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 performed when the CZ is completed. Draw lottery.

<ART lottery process in BB>
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the BB ART lottery processing executed in S431 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not 7 sets of rips have been determined as internal winning combinations (S501). If it is determined that the 7-combination lips have been decided as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BB start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 98 and performs the transfer lottery (F) to ART in BB. .. Referring to FIG. 98, since the transfer lottery (F) is always won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag to ON (S502). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the player has won the ART in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to when the bonus ends.

  Subsequent to S502, or if it is determined in S501 that 7 sets of rips are not determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the BB mode up lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. Then, the mode-up lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (S503). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the BB in-art lottery process.

<Processing during ART>
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the during-ART processing executed in S433 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state is during enemy determination ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy determination ART is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the battle ART in-process shown in FIG. 148 (S517), and ends the ART in-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy determination ART is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the determined flag is ON (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the enemy character of the opponent has been determined during the enemy determination ART. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the determined flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the enemy determination ART in-process shown in FIG. 147 (S516), and ends the ART in-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the enemy determination ART boss power lottery table shown in FIG. 111 to determine the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination. Yes (S513). Then, the effect data for introducing the enemy character is set (S514). The effect data for introducing the enemy character is, for example, effect data for displaying the boss status shown in FIG. 112. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART in the game state of the next game (S515), and finishes the processing during ART.

<Processing during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the enemy determination ART in-progress processing executed in S516 of the ART in-progress processing shown in FIG. 146.

  First, the sub CPU 102 randomly draws effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S521). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 lottery the effect balls based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP and the ART state (see FIGS. 105 to 108). In addition, in this process, the sub CPU 102 also performs lottery of ally balls, and if there is a stock, rewrites the boss ball set in the apocalypse as a ally ball (see FIG. 109). When using the guaranteed number of times for guaranteeing the number of continuous games of the enemy determination ART as described above, the process of S521 may not be performed between the guaranteed number of games.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs HP initial setting processing for the teammate character (S522). In this process, when the HP of the teammate character is less than the initial value (HP50), the sub CPU 102 sets the HP of the teammate character to the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). If it is determined that the boss ball is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the bell is won (S524). At this time, if it is determined that the win is not a bell win (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the enemy determination ART in-progress processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is bell (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines an enemy character corresponding to the boss ball as an opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined flag to ON (S526), and ends the enemy determination ART process.

  On the other hand, in S523, when it is determined that the boss ball is not set (that is, the ally ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the enemy determination ART intermediate ally power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, the HP of the ally character is added to the lottery (S527). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the teammate character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the enemy determination ART process.

<Processing during Battle ART>
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the battle ART mid-process executed in S517 of the ART mid-process shown in FIG. 146.

  First, the sub CPU 102 randomly draws effect balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 lottery the effect balls based on the battle MAP data specified in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 113 to 119). Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 also rewrites the enemy ball based on the awakening ball, and when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the awakening ball and is Bell winning or more. , Rewrite the enemy ball set in the apocalypse as a friend ball.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs damage lottery based on the effect balls and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the sub CPU 102 performs damage lottery by referring to the battle ART damage damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 118, When the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball or an awakening ball, the damage lottery is performed by referring to the battle ART damage damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 119.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the enemy character or the ally character based on the lottery result (S533). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP of the teammate character is 0 or less (S534). When the HP of the teammate character is determined to be 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART game state, sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S535), and ends the battle ART process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the HP of the teammate character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). If it is determined that the HP of the enemy character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the battle ART. On the other hand, if it is determined that the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 120 and 121 and sets the ART state based on the type and the number of continuations of the enemy character. Lottery and set (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the game state of the next game (S538), and ends the battle ART mid-process.

<Processing when winning command is received>
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the winning operation command reception process executed in S408 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S541). When it is determined that the game state is either the normal game state or the high-probability game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal end time CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 150 (S542). In the normal end CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned start transition lottery (A) (D) is performed based on the effect balls set in the apocalypse in the game this time.

  Subsequent to the processing of S542 or in S541, when it is determined that the game state is neither the normal game state nor the high-probability game state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the RT4 game state in which the game state is the normal game state. It is determined whether there is any (S543). When it is determined that the game state is the RT4 game state of the normal game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability transition determination process shown in FIG. 151 (S544). In this high-probability transition determination processing, it is determined whether or not the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S544, or if it is determined in S543 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. Yes (S545). When it is determined that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a high-probability end determination process shown in FIG. 152 (S546). In this high-probability end determination processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to end the high-probability game state, based on the combination of displayed symbols.

  Subsequent to the processing of S546 or in S545, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S547). When it is determined that the game state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the CZ during lottery result management process shown in FIG. 153 (S548). In this lottery result management process during CZ, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to maintain or invalidate the above-mentioned transfer lottery (C) performed during CZ.

  When the process of S548 is completed or if it is determined that the game state of S547 is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command receiving process at the time of winning operation.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal end>
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the normal end time CZ / ART lottery processing executed in S542 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the apocalypse flag is on (S551). If it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not a bell winning or more (S552). When it is determined that the prize is not equal to or more than the bell winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize is equal to or higher than the bell winning (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87, and based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the present game. The transfer lottery (A) (D) to CZ and ART is performed (S553).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won in this lottery (S554). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets CZ to the game state of the next game (S555), and ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART is won (S556). If the player has not won the ART (NO), the normal end CZ / ART lottery process ends, while if the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state is the ART game state. The enemy determination ART is set (S557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to randomly draw the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S558). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state start means, and if the CZ in the lottery (A) (D) transition to CZ and ART based on the effect balls is won, the game state of the next game. Is set to CZ, CZ which is the advantageous state lottery state is started.

<High probability transition determination processing>
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the high-probability transition determination processing executed in S544 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bell spill or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (S561). When it is determined that the bell spill or the RT1 transition rep is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the number of replays and the avoidance points (S562), and ends the high-probability transition determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the bell spilled eyes nor the RT1 shift lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). When it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the high-probability game state to the game state of the next game (S564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of replays (S565), and ends the high-probability transition determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance points are not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay other than the RT1 transition rep is displayed (S566). When it is determined that the combination of symbols relating to the replay other than the RT1 transition rep is not displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that a combination of symbols relating to replays other than the RT1 transition rep is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high-probability transition determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a high-probability state transition means, and is based on the fact that the avoidance point lottery is won in the high-probability game state transition processing (see FIG. 142), to the ART. Shifts the gaming state to a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning the lottery is high.

  In this way, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the main side shifts to the RT4 game state during the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained until the avoidance point is given, and the avoidance point is given. Transition to high probability game state. As in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the situation in which the player is accidentally transitioned to the RT4 gaming state is set to the chance section instead of the penalty section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be too advantageous to the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state, it is possible to adjust the balance of the profits of both the player and the game store by treating it as the normal gaming state until the avoidance point is given. Of course, the balance of the profits of both sides may be adjusted in the entire gaming machine, and therefore, it may be possible to immediately shift from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state at the stage of shifting to the RT4 gaming state on the main side.

<High probability end determination processing>
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the high-probability end determination processing executed in S546 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bell spill or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (S571). If it is determined that neither the bell-folded eye nor the RT1 shift lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability end determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell spill or the RT1 shift lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S573), and ends the high-probability end determination processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a low-probability state transition means, and when a bell spill or an RT1 transition lip is displayed, a normal game state in which the probability of winning the ART transition lottery is low is set. Move the game state.

<CZ lottery result management process>
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the CZ random determination result management processing executed in S548 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery flag is on (S581). When it is determined that the lottery flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ during lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the correct answer is given in the order of pressing (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the pushing order according to the pushing order bell that is won in S490 of FIG. 144, in other words, according to the “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)”. It is determined whether or not a combination of symbols is displayed. If it is determined that the answer is correct in the order of pressing according to the pressing order bell (YES), the sub CPU 102 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583), and ends the lottery result management process during CZ. This causes CZ to continue. In addition, as described above, when the correct answer is given in the pushing order according to the pushing order bell, the lottery result may be maintained while continuing the CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the answer is not correct in the order of pressing according to the pressing order bell (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the winning of ART is successful (S584). If it is determined that the ART is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S587), and ends the CZ lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART determination enemy ART ART as the game state (S585). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 to randomly draw the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S586). Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ during random determination result management process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the lottery state ending means, and based on the fact that it is determined that the correct answer is not made in the pushing order of the pushing order bell during CZ, it is set as the game state of the next game. Set the normal gaming state, or set the ART gaming state as the next gaming state when the CZ completes (YES in S486 of FIG. 144) in the above CZ start ART lottery process (see FIG. 144). ..

<Processing when bonus end command is received>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a bonus end command reception process executed in S410 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the BB end ART lottery table shown in FIG. 101 to perform the lottery (F) for transition to ART based on the current BB mode (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an ART is won (S592). If it is determined that the ART is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S593). When both of S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S596), and ends the bonus end command reception process.

  On the other hand, in the case of YES in either one of S592 and S593, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, and lottery the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the bonus end command reception process.

[Effect of Pachi-slot 1]
The pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effect of JACIN carried over during bonus state>
In Pachi-slot 1, when one of the winning combinations related to JACIN (“F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, “F_JACIN3”) is decided as the internal winning combination, until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (while carrying over) ), It becomes RT4 game state of the bonus state. In this bonus state RT4 game state, JAC1 series replays such as "F_J1 upper row 7 rep" to "F_J1 cross 7 rep", JAC2 series replays such as "F_J2 chance rep 1" to "F_J2 cherry rep", and "F_FJ3" It is possible to determine JAC3 series replays such as “chance rep 1” to “F_J3 cherry rep” as internal winning combinations (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

  In the pachi-slot 1, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination. For example, if a JAC1 series replay is decided as an internal winning combination while "F_JACIN1" is carried over as an internal winning combination, in the game, two types of combinations, "F_JACIN1" and JAC1 series replay, are internal. When the replay of JAC1 system is decided as the internal winning combination in the state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, it is determined as “F_JACIN2” in the game. Two types of winning combinations, JAC1 series replay, have been decided as internal winning combinations.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the stop control can be changed according to the type of the winning combination relating to the JACIN, and when the JAC1 system replay to the JAC3 system replay are determined as the internal winning combination, Stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown by 57 is displayed. By varying the privilege (ART) given to the player by using such control, in the pachi-slot 1, it is possible to change whether or not the privilege is given according to the type of carryover combination, and thus the bonus. It is possible to diversify the game in the state and enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when a replay of the JAC1 system is determined as an internal winning combination while “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination, “7 sets of rep” are displayed and “F_JACIN2” is displayed. When the JAC1 system replay is determined as the internal winning combination while being carried over as the internal winning combination, "normal rep" is displayed. In this way, by changing the stop control depending on the situation in which the privilege is granted and the situation in which the privilege is not granted, it is possible to know whether or not the privilege is awarded from the combination of the symbols displayed, so that the game can be played. The player has a strong interest in the combination of the displayed symbols, and can enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  Note that, with reference to FIG. 57, in the pachi-slot 1, stop control capable of displaying “7 sets of replies” is performed only when the replay is the JAC1 system, and when the replay is the JAC2 system or the JAC3 system, the stop control is performed. It is supposed to perform stop control that cannot display "7 replies". In this regard, even in the case of the JAC2 system replay or the JAC3 system replay, the stop control may be performed so that the “7 sets of rep” can be displayed. Specifically, when a JAC2-based replay is decided as an internal winning combination while "F_JACIN2" is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying "7 sets of replies" is performed, and "F_JACIN1" Alternatively, if the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination while “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, the stop control that cannot display “7 sets of rep” is performed. Similarly, when a replay of the JAC3 series is determined as an internal winning combination while "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying "7 sets of replies" is performed and "F_JACIN1" or " When the replay of the JAC3 series is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN2" is carried over as the internal winning combination, the stop control that cannot display "7 sets of replies" is performed.

  Then, when “7 sets of rep” can be displayed, by referring to the ART lottery table at the start of BB shown in FIG. 98, the transfer lottery (F) to the ART in the bonus state is performed to carry out the carryover combination. Whether or not a privilege is given can be made different depending on the type, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the probability that the privilege is awarded by making the JAC1 system replay, the JAC2 system replay, and the JAC3 system replay different as the internal winning combination is determined. It is possible to increase the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  It should be noted that the combination relationship between the carry-over combination and the winning combination capable of displaying “7 sets of rips” is arbitrary. For example, for the JAC1 series replay, the only carryover combination that can display “7 complete rep” is “F_JACIN1”, and for the JAC2 series replay, the “7 complete rep” can be displayed. There are two types of “F_JACIN1” and “F_JACIN2”, and for JAC3 replays, the carryover combinations capable of displaying “7 sets of rep” may be all “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3”. Of course, the combination is not limited to such a combination, and may be an arbitrary combination.

<Effect of high probability game state>
In Pachi-slot 1, the RT4 game state is established as a high RT state in which the probability of a replay related role being determined as an internal winning combination is high, and when winning the transition to ART, the information of advantageous stop operation in this RT4 game state is notified. By doing so, the ART game state is realized (see FIG. 66). In the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state when the correct answer is given in the pushing order according to the pushing order lip. In Pachi-slot 1, if the player does not win the transition to ART and accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state due to a stop operation, it is not treated as a penalty and shifts to ART even in the RT4 game state that was accidentally shifted. Perform lottery such as lottery that is advantageous to the player. Since the RT4 gaming state is a high RT state, it is possible to play a game without consuming medals. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state not winning the ART is set as a transition chance section to the ART. It is possible to enhance the interest in the high RT state where the privilege is not given.

  In addition, since the transfer lottery to the ART is performed during the RT4 gaming state, the strategic nature for the stop operation during the normal gaming state is increased, and the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. Specifically, in the case of a pachi-slot that handles the case of accidentally shifting to the RT4 game state by a stop operation as a penalty, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation so as not to receive the penalty). Must be done for the left reel). In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1, since the penalty is not imposed during the RT4 game state that is accidentally transferred, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state, and only the playability in the normal game state is used. The operability can also be improved.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, as long as there is an avoidance point, information of a stop operation advantageous in the RT4 gaming state that is accidentally shifted (push order for avoiding the transition to the RT1 gaming state) is notified. As a result, if the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state, the player does not immediately shift to the normal gaming state, and can receive the lottery for shifting to ART with a high replay winning probability for a predetermined period. ..

  In addition, by setting the RT4 gaming state to a high-probability gaming state in which there is a high probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to ART, the RT4 gaming state that was accidentally transitioned can be set as a transition chance section to ART, and a privilege is granted. Not entertaining during a high RT condition can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, an RT0 game state that can be shifted to the RT4 game state and a RT1 game state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 game state are provided as the normal game state. In the pachi-slot, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the profit on the player side and the profit on the game store side so as not to give an excessive profit to either the player or the game store. In this regard, when comparing the pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention, in which the RT4 game state that is accidentally transitioned is set as a transition opportunity section to ART, and other game machines in which the RT4 game state that is accidentally transitioned is set as a penalty section, comparison is made. The pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention is advantageous to the player as compared with other gaming machines. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the balance of the profits of both parties can be adjusted by providing the RT1 gaming state in which the RT4 gaming state cannot be shifted. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variables for adjusting the profit balance of both parties, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in playability.

<Effect of apocalypse during normal gaming state (high probability gaming state)>
In the pachi-slot 1, a complete-running type CZ is provided as a chance zone of ART, and when the apocalypse operates during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed. This transition lottery (A) (D) has a probability according to the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to 4, confirmed balls) set in the apocalypse, when the combination of displayed symbols is “bell winning” or more. Done. In this way, not only the contents of the effect (effect ball set in the apocalypse), but also the combination of the symbols displayed as the result of the game are taken into consideration, and the transfer lottery (A) (D) is performed, thereby changing the game state. Against this, it is possible to intervene the operation of the player, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to CZ when the reels are stopped is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is “Bell winning” or higher, so the rare combination is an internal winning combination during the apocalypse operation. Even if not decided, the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D). Therefore, compared to the case where the game state transition lottery is performed based on the rare role, it is possible to give more opportunities to have a feeling of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the operation of the apocalypse ends when the guaranteed number of times reaches 0, but as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the guaranteed number of times is subtracted at the time of the push-order bell winning. Opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) will be given for the guaranteed number of times (the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) by answering in the correct order in the opportunity). .. As a result, according to the pachi-slot 1, it is possible to avoid a situation where there is no opportunity to receive the transition lottery (A) (D) during the operation of the apocalypse, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. it can. Note that, with reference to FIG. 79 (C), the guaranteed number of times is subtracted even when the internal winning combination is “out”. In this respect, the guaranteed number of times may be subtracted only in the case of the push order bell without subtracting the guaranteed number of times in the case of “out”, whereby the above-mentioned effect becomes more clear.

<Effect of raising lottery of production balls that are not displayed>
Here, the pachi-slot 1 manages the effect balls to be set when the apocalypse is activated even when the apocalypse is not activated. Specifically, in the pachi-slot 1, promotion lottery of effect balls (that is, effect balls that are not being displayed) stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed in a situation where the apocalypse is inactive. By performing this promotion lottery together with the driving of the rotary accessory 200 that is the feature of the eyeball, the player performs the game in the hope that the player will be promoted to a more advantageous effect ball while the eyeball is appearing. As a result, the interest in the game is improved.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, since the light emission of the rotating accessory 200 is controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery, the player has an expectation that the effect ball has been promoted to a more advantageous effect ball. Can be inferred from the color of. As a result, when it can be inferred that the game is advantageous, the player has a strong interest in the subsequent game, so that the player can continue the game without getting tired.

<Management of production balls when power is turned on>
Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball based on the time when the power is turned on. From the time when the power is turned on, for example, it is the time before the business in the game store, and by comparing with the time when the power is turned off, it is known that the time is before the next day. Therefore, if it can be determined from the time when the power is turned on, for example, that it is the start of business on the next day, by setting a new production ball different from the previous day, the setting value can be changed from the production ball. It is possible to prevent the presence / absence of the user from being recognized, and the fairness among the players is not impaired. On the other hand, if it can be determined from the time when the power is turned on that the power is only temporarily cut off, the pachi-slot 1 maintains the effect balls without rewriting, thereby playing before and after the power is turned off. Maintain machine status. From the player's point of view, even if the power supply is temporarily cut off when the production ball that is advantageous to the player is registered, the advantageous production ball will be maintained after the power is turned on again, so it is dissatisfied. You can play games without feeling.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, when rewriting the effect balls, the effect balls to be newly set are determined by lottery. As a method of making it difficult to know whether or not the set value has been changed, it is possible to rewrite the effect balls to the effect balls in a predetermined initial state when the power is turned on the next day, but in such a method, a plurality of game machines are used. If the is installed, the variety of games is diminished. Therefore, the pachi-slot 1 secures the variety of games by randomly determining the effect balls to be newly set.

<Effect of CZ>
Pachi-slot 1 has a complete-running CZ as an ART chance zone. In this CZ, although it ends when the transition lottery during the CZ performed during the push-order bell is maintained, even if the transition lottery is performed, if the stop operation is performed in the correct-push order in the push-order bell. , The transfer lottery is invalidated, and CZ continues. With such a CZ, it is possible to receive the lottery for the transition to the ART not only when the push order bell is won, but also when the CZ is completed, so even if the push order bell is not won at all during the CZ, the player does not win. Will be given an opportunity to move to ART, and the interest during CZ can be improved.

  Further, in Pachi-slot 1, since it is decided to give more advantageous privilege (shift to advantageous ART) when the CZ finishes, the player may cancel the shift lottery during the CZ performed at the time of pushing order bell winning. As a result of wanting and as a result, the player is interested in the combination of the displayed symbols, and the interest in each game during CZ can be improved. Also, for the player, the player wants to complete a more advantageous CZ, so that the interest in the CZ can be maintained until the end.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, invalid points are given during the CZ, and as long as the invalid points remain, the transfer lottery during the CZ is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of receiving a more advantageous transition lottery at the time of completing the CZ, and improve the interest during the CZ.

  In addition, the pachi-slot 1 is provided with a plurality of CZ modes with different expectations for winning the transfer lottery during the CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuous games in the CZ. As a result, in Pachi-slot 1, since the degree of expectation of ART transition increases as the CZ continues, the player becomes strongly interested in the combination of the symbols displayed in the CZ, and the interest in the CZ is increased. Can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot 1, when the invalid points remain, an effect is suggested or informed of the current CZ mode. As a result, the player can grasp or infer to what extent the CZ has continued to be advantageous, and thus the interest in the CZ can be improved. The effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of the invalid point. That is, the pachi-slot 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games to be switched from the CZ mode 0 defined in CZ_MAP to the CA mode 1 with the number of continuous games of CZ up to the present.

  In addition, when the winning is performed in the transition lottery during the CZ performed at the time of the push order bell during the CZ, the lottery result may be maintained regardless of whether or not there is a correct answer in the push order. Then, in the case where the winning in the transition lottery in the middle of CZ is maintained and the correct answer is given in the pushing order, the CZ is continued while the right of ART is given by the number corresponding to the lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of keeping the winning in the transfer lottery in the middle of CZ, if the wrong answer is made in the pushing order, the CZ ends, but the right of ART is granted based on the lottery result.

  By doing this, you can expect to win the lottery to move to ART multiple times during CZ, and you will feel the dissatisfaction that you will feel if you invalidate it even though you originally won it, It does not make the player feel. Also, for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the CZ does not end when the transition lottery during the CZ is performed, then the transition lottery during the CZ and the transition lottery during the completion of the CZ are further received. Since the opportunity is obtained, the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the CZ, and the interest of the game during the CZ can be improved.

<Effect of BB mode in bonus state>
The pachi-slot 1 is provided with a plurality of BB modes with different expectations for winning the lottery for transitioning to the ART in the bonus state, and during the bonus state, the BB mode is upgraded based on the internal winning combination. Since the probability of winning the lottery for transition to ART is changed based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state in this way, the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state. , It is possible to increase the interest in the bonus state.

  In particular, in Pachi-slot 1, in the BB mode with a low expectation of winning the transition lottery, the BB mode is upgraded with a lot of winning combinations, while in the BB mode with a high expectation of winning the transition lottery, a small number of winning combinations. Only BB mode can be upgraded. As a result, as the BB mode is upgraded, the types of winning combinations that are upgraded to the higher BB mode are reduced, but as the BB mode is upgraded, the expectation of winning the transition lottery is increased, and thus the gaming state is gradually increased. You can create a game form that is upgraded to. For the player, instead of being interested in a single game result in the bonus state, he / she is interested in a series of game results in the bonus state, thereby increasing interest in the bonus state. You can

  It should be noted that the BB mode may be upgraded one step at a time, or a plurality of steps may be upgraded at one time. If you control so that you can upgrade only one step at a time, compared to the case where you can upgrade multiple steps at once, the expectation while staying in the BB mode with a lower expectation of winning the transition lottery decreases, Since it is easy to upgrade from the mode, it is easy to create a game mode in which the game state is gradually upgraded.

  Also, in Pachi-slot 1, when a JAC2-based replay or a JAC3-based replay is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, it is treated as “Chanrip” according to the type of carryover combination carried over as an internal winning combination. In some cases, it is handled as replay (see FIG. 96). Then, the BB mode is upgraded when it is treated as "Chanlip", and the BB mode is not upgraded when treated as "Replay". Thereby, the game in the bonus state can be diversified, and the interest in the bonus state can be enhanced.

<Start control of enemy decision ART after bonus ends>
Also, in Pachi-slot 1, when the winning combination related to JACIN is determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the state shifts to the high RT state (RT4 gaming state) and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to JACIN is displayed. And shift to a low RT state (RT2 game state). Since this RT state is maintained even after the bonus state has ended, when the bonus state ends in the low RT state, the low RT state also results in the bonus non-winning state.

  From the player's point of view, it is sufficient to perform the stop operation while avoiding the display of the combination of symbols according to the winning combination related to JACIN, but the player who has little knowledge of the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to do so. It is not always possible to perform such a stop operation, and the player may be disadvantaged. Here, when the RT is in the low RT state, it is often controlled that the ART is being prepared without executing the ART. If the state of the preparation is continued, the player is likely to feel dissatisfied and the interest is lowered. Not only will it be lost, but time efficiency will be reduced by the amount of the preparation period. The disadvantage to the player may be, for example, a decrease in interest during preparation or a decrease in time efficiency.

  In this regard, in Pachi-slot 1, when the bonus state ends while the player wins the ART, the ART (more specifically, AT) is executed regardless of the type of the RT game state, and the disadvantage to the player is reduced. To do. Specifically, in Pachi-slot 1, it has an enemy decision ART and a battle ART as the ART game state, and it is determined whether or not the ART game state is continued in the battle ART performed after the enemy decision ART. A game is performed to increase the expectation of continuation of the ART game state like increasing the HP of the character. Therefore, even if the ART is executed in the low RT state after the bonus state ends, first, the enemy-deciding ART, which is a chance section for increasing the continuation expectation degree, can be executed, so that the game is monotonous like in preparation. It is possible to mitigate the decline in interest (disadvantage) without becoming. Further, since the period during preparation is not provided in the first place, there is no reduction in time efficiency, and the disadvantage to the player can be reduced.

<Effect of enemy decision ART>
In Pachi-slot 1, a boss ball is set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART, and the enemy character to compete in the battle ART is determined according to the type of the boss ball set at the time of winning the push order bell. Then, during the battle ART, the HP reduction amount of the teammate character and the HP reduction amount of the enemy character are changed according to the type of the enemy character. As a result, the result of the game during the enemy decision ART affects whether or not the ART game state is continued, so that the player's interest in continuing the ART game state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

  Further, in Pachi-slot 1, since both the attack power and the defense power are set for the enemy character, both the reduction amount of HP of the ally character and the reduction amount of HP of the enemy character are individually set for each enemy character. Can be set. As a result, it is possible to employ various types of enemy characters such as an enemy character having both high attack power and defense power, an enemy character having only one of them having high power, and an enemy character having both having low power. It is possible to diversify the game during the battle ART according to the result of the game.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency with which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. Thereby, the game during the battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game during the enemy determination ART.

  In Pachi-slot 1, the HP of the teammate character is added during the enemy determination ART. If a lot of additions are made by this, it becomes easier to avoid that the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 during the battle ART, and the expectation level for the ART game state to continue increases. Become. As a result, not only the game during the battle ART but also the game during the enemy determination ART will affect the continuation of the ART gaming state. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state is increased by playing the game a plurality of times. It can last for a long time.

  In Pachi-slot 1, if the HP of the teammate character becomes less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the teammate character is set to the initial value. As a result, the HP of the teammate character becomes at least the initial value or more in the subsequent battle ART, so that the HP of the teammate character can be prevented from immediately becoming 0 during the battle ART, and as a result, the continuous advantageous ART state can be immediately obtained. It can be prevented from ending.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the HP of the teammate character in the enemy determination ART is added according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, for example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the additional amount can be increased, so that the rare combination is not wasteful and the interest during the enemy determination ART is improved. You can

  Also, in Pachi-slot 1, if a rare role is decided as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a lottery of the allied ball is performed, and if the lottery is won, the boss ball set in the apocalypse becomes the allied ball. rewrite. The enemy-decision ART ends with a bell win in a game in which a boss ball is set in the apocalypse area 113A, so not only can you expect the continuation of the enemy-decision ART by replacing the boss ball with a friend ball, Since it is possible to expect an increase in the HP of the teammate character triggered by the teammate ball, as a result, the expectation of continuing the battle ART also increases. In this case, by excluding the boss balls 7 and 8 in which the continuation of the battle ART is confirmed from the boss balls to be rewritten, the battle ART is more easily continued, which is preferable.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, each time the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is determined during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP (lottery information) that defines the boss MAP data for determining the effect ball is updated. In the pachi-slot 1, the boss MAP is provided with a ceiling function, and when the boss MAP on the ceiling is reached, the HP of the boss balls 7 and 8 or the teammate character whose battle ART is determined to continue is increased. Only the ally ball is decided as the production ball to be set in the apocalypse. From the player's point of view, if the enemy determination ART continues for a long time, only the boss balls 7, 8 or ally balls will be set in the apocalypse, so they will be interested in the current boss MAP and play games. The interest of the game during the enemy decision ART is improved.

<Effect of Battle ART>
In the pachi-slot 1, an enemy ball or a teammate ball is set in the apocalypse during the battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or the teammate character is decreased depending on the type of the effect ball set at the time of winning the push order bell. Then, if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the ART is continued, and if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 first, the ART is ended. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the player's start operation, the player actively participates in the game during the battle ART, and the motivation for the game can be improved. ..

  Further, the target for reducing the HP according to the push order bell differs depending on the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Here, in the apocalypse, the effect balls up to multiple destinations are set, so the player can play the game after grasping the set effect balls, an advantageous timing for the player side. You will want to win the push order bell. As a result, the effect ball and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play the game with a sense of tension, so that the interest during the battle ART can be improved.

  Further, since the push order combination that reduces HP is a winning combination to be notified during the battle ART, the determination of the push order bell as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART. It will be. For example, depending on the game machine, the winning combination that reduces the HP of the teammate character may be replayed, and the winning combination that reduces the HP of the enemy character may be set as the push order bell. However, in such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of a winning combination that affects profits is directly linked to the continuation of ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, like Pachi-slot 1, by making the winning of the push order bell that influences profits advantageous or disadvantageous according to the effect ball that is set, diversify the game during the battle ART It is possible to enhance the interest in the battle ART.

  In Pachi-slot 1, when a so-called rare combination is won, the HP of the enemy character is reduced regardless of the effect balls that are set. As a result, it is possible to prevent waste of the rare role, and the player expects that the rare role will be determined as an internal winning combination during the battle ART, thereby enhancing the interest during the battle ART. You can

  Also, in Pachi-slot 1, if four enemy balls have been set in succession during the battle ART, the ally ball is always set next. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation that is unfavorable to the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the battle ART with peace of mind.

<Sound when ART is confirmed>
In addition, in the pachi-slot 1, when the continuation of the ART is confirmed, a special sound is output to notify the player that the ART will continue. At this time, since the player may not be able to grasp the change just by changing the song in ART, the pachi-slot 1 outputs the sound effect (siren) output only when the ART is continued before changing the song. . As a result, in the pachi-slot 1, the player can easily recognize that the ART continues.

<Control of accessories during ART>
In the pachi-slot 1, by driving the rotary accessory 200 in various modes during the ART, a special effect is produced during the ART and the game during the ART is heaped up. In this case, the pachi-slot 1 stops the driving of the rotary accessory 200 and returns the movable part of the rotary accessory 200 to the initial position when the player leaves the seat during the ART (for example, the cover member 198 is closed). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of the rotating accessory 200 while enlarging the game during the ART by using the rotating accessory 200, and as a result, it is possible to extend the life of the gaming machine.

<Switching production>
In the pachi-slot 1, the effect in the pachi-slot 1 is classified into a layer-switching type effect and an effect-switching type effect and set, and progress of a game such as a stop operation and operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button). For example, the production is switched. Layer switching type production is suitable for suppressing flickering of images, and by setting a production that causes flickering easily before and after switching and makes the player uncomfortable as a layer switching type production, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect switching type effect requires less processing load, it is possible to prevent processing omission due to effect switching.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the player is urged to perform an operation unrelated to the progress of the game, such as a chance button, and the effect to be switched is changed depending on whether or not the predetermined operation is performed. As a result, the playability is diversified and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Panel control when calling non-production images>
In the pachi-slot 1, a so-called illumina array (panel device 400) is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, and it is possible to perform a highly effective effect by linking the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the display of the panel device 400. At this time, when a non-effect image such as a menu screen or an error screen is called on the liquid crystal display device 11 during the effect display on the panel device 400, the effect display on the panel device 400 is covered by the non-effect image and the non-effect image is visually recognized. Sex is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, when the non-production image is called during the production in the panel device 400, the final output of the LED 403 that causes the panel device 400 to emit light is suppressed, so that the non-production image is produced in the panel device 400. Prevents the display from being overwhelmed. In this way, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and no processing such as error processing is added to the execution process of the effect data itself, the process at the time of calling the non-effect image can be simplified and a bug Occurrence can be reduced.

  Further, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally, when the display of the non-effect image is finished, the effect on the panel device 400 is restarted from the middle. .. Also in this case, since the process of suspending and resuming the effect in the panel device 400 is not added, the process can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be reduced.

<Process at the time of sequence error>
The sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 checks whether the order of the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 is normal, and if the order of the commands is abnormal, performs a predetermined sequence error time process. When managing a part of the game state on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, it is necessary to appropriately acquire various information according to the progress of the game on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, and when some information cannot be acquired. , Players may get unreasonable profits.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, when a sequence error occurs, the state advantageous to the player is forcibly ended, thereby preventing the player from obtaining an unreasonable profit. Specifically, if the sub control circuit 101 cannot recognize that the bell-eye drops are displayed in the CZ, the player unfairly gains the benefit of continuing the CZ. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, when a sequence error occurs during the CZ, the CZ is forcibly terminated and the player is prevented from obtaining an unjust profit due to an illegal act.

  Further, in Pachi-slot 1, if the sub control circuit 101 cannot grasp that the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed during the high-probability game state, the player unfairly benefits from the continuation of the high-probability game state. I will get it. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, if a sequence error occurs during the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is forcibly ended, and the player is prevented from obtaining an unjust profit by an illegal act.

[Second Embodiment]
The pachi-slot 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Next, the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, the control in the case of shifting to the bonus state during the enemy determination ART will be described. Specifically, the management of the effect balls used in the enemy determination ART after the bonus state transferred during the enemy determination ART is finished will be described.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten to new effect balls. Here, the effect balls to be rewritten may be all of the six effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 or may be a part of them. When rewriting only some of the effect balls, the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls may be prioritized, and the effect balls to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority order. Further, the number of effect balls to be rewritten may be determined by lottery. That is, when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a predetermined lottery may be performed to determine how many of the six effect balls are rewritten.

  Further, since the boss balls 7 and 8 and the friendly balls are effect balls that are advantageous to the player, these effect balls may be maintained without being rewritten. In addition, when the boss balls 7 and 8 and the friendly balls are effect balls which are not displayed (that is, effect balls stored in the storage area “6” of the sub RAM 103), the player can grasp. However, since the player will not be dissatisfied even if the player rewrites the boss balls 7 and 8 and the teammate balls that are not displayed, they may be rewritten as new effect balls.

  The new effect ball can be determined by lottery of the boss MAP and determined based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Here, as described above, the boss MAP is provided with the ceiling function, and when the boss MAPs “52” and “53” are updated, thereafter, only the boss balls 7 and 8 and the friendly balls are determined as the production balls. Will be done. In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP for determining a new effect ball is updated to the advantageous boss MAP. Good.

  That is, in the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is updated so as to approach the ceiling. It may be that. Specifically, in a boss MAP that reaches the ceiling when updated to a predetermined value, a mode in which a specific value is added to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART can be considered. For example, when the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is the boss MAP “30”, if the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, “10” is added to the boss MAP and the boss is added. A new effect ball may be determined based on MAP “40”.

  Further, as another specific example, instead of adding to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART, when the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the boss MAP is updated to a specific boss MAP. It may be done. For example, if the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “40” is uniformly set regardless of the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART, and a new effect ball is created. May be determined. Of course, if the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the first range (for example, the boss MAP “0” to “10”) without uniformly setting the specific boss MAP, If one specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “20”) and the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the second range (for example, boss MAP “11” to “20”), It may be the second specific boss MAP (for example, the boss MAP “30”).

As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus state is entered during the enemy determination ART, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten with new effect balls. That is, in the second embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a profit state rewriting means, and when a winning combination related to a bonus (BB) is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, it is stored in the sub RAM 103. Rewrite all or part of the six production balls that are present.
Since the ART game state manages the ease of continuation based on the effect balls, the enemy decision ART after the bonus ends progresses based on the new effect balls to control the duration of the ART game state. It can be rich in sex. In this case, by maintaining the rendition balls that are advantageous to the player such as the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls without rewriting, the player can play the subsequent games with expectation, and The interest is improved.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, a method of determining effect balls during the battle ART will be described. Here, in the pachi-slot 1 of the first embodiment, an effect ball (allied ball or enemy ball) is determined according to the type of the enemy character of the opponent during the battle ART (see FIGS. 113 to 115). In this respect, in the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, the effect ball is determined by also considering the remaining HP of the teammate character.

  FIG. 156 is a battle MAP lottery table referenced when the opponent enemy character is boss 1 and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 20 or less, and FIG. 157 is the opponent enemy character is boss 5. Yes, the battle MAP lottery table is referred to when the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, if the opponent character's enemy character is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 21 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 113 is referred to and the teammate character's When the remaining HP is 20 or less, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 156 is referred to. Similarly, if the opponent character's enemy character is the boss 5 and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 11 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to, and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less. In some cases, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is referred to. Note that the battle MAP lottery table when the other bosses are enemy characters of the opponent is omitted.

  Comparing FIG. 113 and FIG. 156, it can be seen that even if the opponent character of the opponent is the boss 1, the probability that the battle MAP of the transfer destination is randomly selected varies depending on the remaining HP of the teammate character. .. More specifically, compared to the battle MAP lottery table referenced when the remaining HP of the teammate character shown in FIG. 113 is large, the battle MAP lottery table referenced when the remaining HP of the teammate character shown in FIG. 156 is small. Has a high probability that “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27”, and “28” will be determined as the battle MAP of the transfer destination.

  As described above, the battle MAPs “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27”, and “28” are battle MAPs in which the teammates or the awakening balls are always randomly selected as effect balls. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases, the attack frequency of the teammate character increases. It should be noted that, comparing FIG. 115 and FIG. 157, similarly when the opponent character of the opponent is the boss 5, as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases, the attack frequency of the teammate character increases.

  On the other hand, comparing FIGS. 156 and 157, the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character and the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers the attack frequency of the teammate character differ depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent.

  For example, referring to the transition-source battle MAP “1” in which the opponent character of the opponent is the boss 1, the battle MAP in which the teammate or the awakening ball is always randomly selected is about 60% or more according to the remaining HP of the teammate character. It has risen to about 80%. On the other hand, referring to the transition source battle MAP “1” in which the opponent character of the opponent is the boss 5, the battle MAP in which the teammate or the awakening ball is always randomly selected is about 22% or more according to the remaining HP of the teammate character. It has risen to about 48%. Therefore, it can be seen that the attack frequency increase rate of the teammate character varies depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, when the opponent character of the opponent is boss 1, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the teammate character is 20 or less, and as shown in FIG. 157. When the opponent character of the opponent is the boss 5, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less. Therefore, it can be seen that the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character varies depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent. That is, in the third embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes probability changing means, and the HP of the ally character is less than the change threshold value (for example, when the opponent enemy character is the boss 1, HP “20” or less, When it is the boss 5, when the HP becomes “10” or less), the MAP lottery is changed, and the frequency with which the ally character attacks is changed.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases, the attack frequency of the teammate character can be increased, so that it is possible to perform an effect such as reversing from a pinch, and play the game during the battle ART. It can be something that makes you sweat. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability of whether or not the ART gaming state continues, and the enjoyment of the game in the ART gaming state is improved.

  Also, by increasing the attack frequency increase rate of the teammate character and the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers the attack frequency of the teammate character to differ depending on the type of the enemy character, a game of whether or not the ART game state continues The sexuality can be further diversified, and the enjoyment of the game in the ART game state is improved.

  Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the attack frequency of the teammate character is increased only once, in other words, the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers the attack frequency of the teammate character is increased for each enemy character. Although only one is set, it is not limited to this. Specifically, when the HP of the ally character is less than or equal to the first value, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased by one step, and when the HP of the ally character is less than or equal to the second value that is less than the first value, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased. The attack frequency of the teammate character may be increased a plurality of times, such as increasing by one step.

  In this case, the number of times the ally character's attack frequency is increased may be different depending on the type of the enemy character. By doing so, for example, an enemy character whose attack frequency of the teammate character gradually increases as the HP of the teammate character decreases, or when the HP of the teammate character becomes very small and the attack frequency of the teammate character sharply increases. A character can be created, and as a result, the playability of whether or not the ART game state continues can be further diversified, and the interest of the game in the ART game state is improved.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment, an effect control method at the end of the bonus state will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment, an effect for ending the bonus is set at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end, and the bonus ends when the bonus state actually ends as a result of the game. While the hourly effect is executed, when the bonus state is not ended, the bonus end effect is rewritten to the bonus continuation effect, and the bonus continuation effect is executed.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the flow of the BB ART lottery process executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the BB ART lottery process (see FIG. 145) executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the first embodiment. .. The BB ART lottery process shown in FIG. 158 is performed when a start command is received during the bonus state (see S431 in FIG. 139).

  Comparing the in-BB ART lottery processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 145 with the in-BB ART lottery processing of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 158, the steps of S601 to S604 of the in-BB ART lottery processing of the fourth embodiment are performed. Since the process is the same as the process of S501 to S504 of the ART lottery process of the first embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 158, following the processing of S604, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is "9" or less (S605). When the value of the bonus end number counter is equal to or less than "9" (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently registers the bonus end effect and ends the BB ART lottery process. On the contrary, when the value of the bonus end number counter is not equal to or less than "9" (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-art lottery process. The bonus end effect is an effect performed at the end of the current game, for example, a screen for notifying the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the result of ART lottery performed during the bonus state. It is a display to be displayed.

  Here, in pachi-slot 1, the maximum payout number per game in the bonus state is 10. Therefore, if the value of the bonus end number counter is "9" or less, the bonus state may end. is there. The processing of S604 and S605 is processing of registering an effect for ending the bonus at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end. The bonus end number counter may be independently managed by the sub side, or the information (see FIG. 124) managed by the main side may be acquired through various commands.

  Next, FIG. 159 is a flow of the winning operation command reception process executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the winning operation command reception process executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 149). It is a flowchart showing. The winning operation command reception process shown in FIG. 159 is performed when the command received from the main side is the winning operation command (see S408 of FIG. 138).

  Comparing the winning operation command reception time processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 149 with the winning operation command reception time processing of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 159, the winning operation command reception time processing of the fourth embodiment is S611. The processes of S618 to S618 are the same as the processes of S541 to S548 of the winning operation command reception process of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 159, following the processing of S618, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in BB (S619). If the game is in BB (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes in-BB effect control processing to be described later in S160 (S620), and ends the winning operation command reception time processing. On the other hand, if it is not in the BB (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the winning operation command reception process.

  Subsequently, FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the flow of the mid-BB production control process executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment. The during-BB effect control process shown in FIG. 160 is performed when a winning operation command is received during the bonus state (see S620 in FIG. 159).

  As shown in FIG. 160, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end effect is registered (S631). When the bonus end effect is not registered (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB effect control process.

  On the other hand, if the bonus end effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S632). When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes the registered effect (effect at the time of bonus end) (S634), and the BB in-time effect control process. To finish.

  On the other hand, when the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (NO), the sub CPU 102 rewrites the registered bonus end effect to the bonus continuation effect (S633), and subsequently, the rewritten bonus. The continuous effect is executed (S634), and the in-BB effect control process ends.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end, the bonus end effect is set once, while based on the result of the game, Change the effect to be executed at the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect at the end from being executed even though the bonus state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the bonus state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an effect control means, sets an effect for ending the bonus at the start of the game in which the bonus state may end, and also sets the game result (end of bonus). Based on the value of the number of counters), it is controlled whether the bonus end effect set at the start of the game is executed or the bonus continuation effect is rewritten and the bonus continuation effect is executed.

  Further, even if the number of medals paid out during the bonus state is diversified, the end of the bonus state can be appropriately notified, which is preferable. That is, depending on the gaming machine, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state may be fixed. In such a gaming machine, since the timing when the bonus state ends is fixed, the effect at the end is not erroneously executed, but the game in the bonus state becomes monotonous.

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state varies depending on the result of the game, so that the bonus game is prevented from becoming monotonous while the bonus state is prevented. It is possible to appropriately notify the end of the state.

[Modification]
The pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the pachi-slot of the above-mentioned embodiment, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, the internal winning combination is set to "Bell winning" or more, or the combination of the displayed symbols is "Bell winning" or more, and is set. The lottery etc. will be performed based on the effect balls. In this respect, when the effect balls are set in the apocalypse, lottery based on the effect balls may be performed regardless of the internal winning combination and the combination of the displayed symbols. In such a pachi-slot, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting a blank (empty) in the apocalypse.

  In the pachi-slot of the above-described embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 manages the transition control to the advantageous state (for example, “ART state”), the duration of the advantageous state, and the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed in the main control circuit 91.

  The transition control to the advantageous state includes, for example, control regarding transition / non-transition to the advantageous state (transition lottery). Further, for example, in the case of the pachi-slot 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state, control regarding transition between the states can be included in the control for shifting to the advantageous state.

  Further, the management of the duration of the advantageous state is control relating to increase / decrease in HP of the enemy character and the ally character in the above embodiment, and in the case of other pachi-slots, for example, the number of initial games in the advantageous state is set. The determination and the addition control of the number of AT games are included. Further, for example, in the case of the pachi-slot 1 in which the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, lottery as to whether or not to continue can also be included in the management of the duration of the advantageous state.

  As the duration of the advantageous state, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the number of unit games during the advantageous state, the number of times information that is advantageous to the player is notified during the advantageous state, and the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state. It is possible to include an arbitrary period such as the number of sets when the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is one set.

  At this time, as the number of medals awarded in the advantageous state, a net increase in number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game may be used. Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on the medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on the actual value), and regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased. , May be calculated based on the number of medals expected to increase when the navigation is followed (calculation by an ideal value). Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as internal winning combinations, or for the winning combinations in which the combination of symbols is displayed / hidden depending on the timing of the stop operation, the winning combinations have been determined as internal winning combinations. However, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

  The management of the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state includes control for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous for the player by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like.

  In addition, as a mode of the stop operation informing the player, the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which a combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be displayed, and the combination of the symbols is displayed. It may be the timing of the stop operation necessary for that purpose (the pattern to be aimed at).

  In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game play), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is set. A so-called “AT” may be used to notify, and a re-play high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play becomes high, and a stop operation advantageous for the player It is also possible to use a so-called “ART” that informs the mode.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot of the embodiment or the various modifications described above, an effect determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91, that is, one or a plurality of effects for one internal winning combination. Are going to do. In this respect, the display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the one-to-one correspondence with the determined internal winning combination may be performed on the above-described 7-segment display 28 or a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination. The display of the internal winning combination is preferably performed under the control of the main control circuit 91. In this way, the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 is notified by the main control circuit 91 itself, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness.

[Appendix 1]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. We hope that the number of navigation games) will increase.

  Further, in recent years, triggered by a predetermined condition, a high-probability replay state (RT) in which a probability that a replay (replay) that can be played without inserting medals is determined as an internal winning combination is high A game machine that operates is also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-204875 discloses a gaming machine that activates a high-probability replay state when the bonus state ends.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
According to the gaming machine of the patent document, since the high-probability replay state operates after the bonus ends, it is possible to play the game without reducing the medals after the bonus ends, but the high-probability replay state always occurs after the bonus ends. , There is a possibility that the game during the bonus becomes monotonous. Therefore, in the gaming machine that operates the high-probability replay state after the bonus ends, there is a demand for a mechanism in which the game during the bonus does not become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game in a special gaming state.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A symbol changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) for changing the symbol by doing, a normal state, and a special game state (for example, a bonus) which is a game state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. State) and a lottery table provided corresponding to a plurality of game states, and a switching means (for example, main control) for switching the game state triggered by a predetermined condition. Based on the path 91) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations by referring to the internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state. (For example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detection means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning. Variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that stops the change of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means is displayed. Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line, the winning determination means (eg, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won. , The internal lottery table provided corresponding to the special game state, when the internal winning combination determination means is determined as an internal winning combination, during the special game state, the winning determination means Any of a plurality of carry-over combinations (for example, F_JACIN1 to 3) that can be carried over as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the internal winning combination is determined, and in the special game state, When the first internal carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN1) is carried over as an internal winning combination, a predetermined combination (for example, F_J1) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the upper row 7 lip to F_J1 cross 7 lip) is determined as an internal winning combination, a privilege (for example, winning for the ART transition lottery) is given, and a second carryover combination different from the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN2). When the predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination and the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a privilege granting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that does not grant the privilege is further provided.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry over any of the plurality of carryover combinations as an internal winning combination during the special game state. Then, the game machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, gives the privilege when the first carryover combination is carried over, and does not give the privilege when the second carryover combination is carried over. .. As a result, even if the predetermined winning combination is won internally, it is possible to change whether or not the privilege is given according to the type of carryover combination, so that it is possible to diversify the game in the special gaming state. , The interest of the game during the special game state can be enhanced.

[Appendix 2]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in the gaming machine having the ART function, even if the transition to the advantageous state is not decided, the operation in the high probability re-gaming state may be performed by the stop operation of the player. In this regard, according to the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-233721), when the transition to the advantageous state is not decided, the information which is advantageous to the player is not notified during the high probability re-play state, and It is described that control is performed to fall from the probability replay state to the normal state.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Here, the control to fall from the high-probability replay state to the normal state when the transition to the advantageous state is not determined is used as a so-called penalty, and happens to be the high-probability replay state by the player's stop operation. It was general that the lottery itself for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed when the operation of.

  However, even if the gaming state is the high-probability re-gaming state, if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed, the high-probability re-gaming state in which the privilege is not given (for example, RT in non-winning ART) It lacks the fun of (middle).

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of a game to which no privilege is given.

[Means for solving the problem]

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a low probability that a replay related to a replay will be determined as an internal winning combination (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state) and a probability that the replay is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a higher RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and the reels Symbol display means (for example, the display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed symbols, start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, On the basis of the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the symbol varying means for varying the symbol by rotating the reel (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepper). Motor, and based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the first symbol combination (for example, RT4 transition lip) or the second symbol depending on the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. A combination (for example, RT1 transition lip) can be stopped and displayed as a first push forward combination (for example, push forward lip), and a third symbol combination (for example, according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined). , Bell bell eyes) or a fourth combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols displayed at the time of pressing the correct answer) and a second pressing forward combination (for example, pressing order bell) that can be stopped and displayed From the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and that detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. Operation detection The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stage (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped by the reel stop control means, Depending on the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, and according to the first pushing forward combination by the determination means during the normal state. When it is determined that the first symbol combination of the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination has stopped, the game is switched from the normal state to the high RT state. RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) to shift the state, and during the high RT state, the third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination according to the second pushing forward combination by the determining means. When it is determined that the third symbol combination among the above has stopped, the gaming state is transferred from the high RT state to the normal state, and when it is determined that the fourth symbol combination has stopped, the high When the RT ending means for maintaining the RT state (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to ART) are won during the normal state or the high RT state, a game effect state , A specific effect state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that shifts to a specific effect state (for example, an ART game state) that informs advantageous stop operation information, and the predetermined lottery in a non-winning state. When the RT starting means shifts the game state to the high RT state, the information on the stop operation necessary for stopping the fourth symbol combination when the second press winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination ( For example, the notification number determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that determines the number of times of notification (for example, the guaranteed number of times) for notifying the pressing order bell of the correct answer order, and the specific effect state transition means are for the specific effect state. If it shifts to, while notifying the information of the stop operation necessary to stop the first symbol combination when the first push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal state, the high Information of advantageous stop operation is notified during the RT state, and when the second push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the high RT state of non-winning in the predetermined lottery, the notification number determining means. Decided Informing means for informing information advantageous stop operation only serial notice frequency (e.g., sub-control circuit 101, a liquid crystal display device 11) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are a normal state in which a replay related to a replay is determined as an internal winning combination and a high RT state in which a replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high and a high RT state. By informing the information of the advantageous stop operation in the specific effect state inside, it is possible to realize the advantageous game state (so-called ART) for the player. Here, since the transition to the specific effect state is performed not only by the predetermined lottery performed in the normal state but also by winning the predetermined lottery performed in the high RT state, the predetermined lottery is won. Even in the case of shifting to the high RT state in the absence state, it can be expected to shift to the specific effect state thereafter. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to set a high RT state which is not won in a predetermined lottery as a chance opportunity section to shift to an advantageous gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is given. There is no (not winning the predetermined lottery), the interest in the high RT state can be enhanced.

  Further, since the predetermined lottery is carried out during the high RT state, the strategic characteristic for the stop operation during the normal state is increased, and the interest during the normal state can be enhanced. That is, as in the conventional gaming machine, in the game property that a penalty is imposed during the high RT state in which the privilege is not given, the stop operation in the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed so as not to receive the penalty). I have to do it for the left reel). In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, so that the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state, and Not only playability but also operability can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second push combination is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is ended and the game state is shifted to the normal state, but the predetermined When shifting to a high RT state in a state where the lottery is not won, information on advantageous stop operation (for example, when the second push forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination). Information of a specific stop operation) is notified a predetermined number of times. As a result, if the player shifts to the high RT state accidentally by the stop operation, the player will not immediately shift from the high RT state to the normal state, and will receive a predetermined lottery in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high. be able to.

[Appendix 3]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed so as to transition to the ART state with high probability. .. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in a chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. As a winning combination, a gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability is disclosed.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In the gaming machine of such patent document, the interest of the player in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, an opportunity in which the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not get any chance, despite the fact that the player has moved to the chance zone, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is determined. When pressed, depending on the order of the stop operation, the first symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination displayed at the time of the correct pressing order) or the second symbol combination (for example, the bell-eye pattern) can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a combination (for example, a push order bell), and a corresponding one of the plurality of reels. The stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation detecting means by the stop operation detecting means. On the basis of the timing at which the reel is detected, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 9) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. ), And when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, it is determined by the internal winning combination determination means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. The winning state determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination has won, and the advantageous state lottery for performing the transition lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. The lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting a state (for example, CZ), and the internal winning combination determination means for determining the pushing forward combination as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state. The first transition lottery (for example, transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) for determining to shift to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability is performed, and a predetermined number of single lottery is performed in the advantageous state lottery state. Advantageous state lottery means for performing a second transition lottery (for example, transition lottery to ART performed at the time of completing the CZ) that determines with a certain probability that the state game (for example, 30 games) is transitioned to the advantageous state (for example, When the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game in which the sub-control circuit 101) and the first transition lottery are performed, the first transition regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state. When the lottery is invalidated and the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game, the lottery result management means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that maintains the lottery result of the first transfer lottery. , In the advantageous state lottery state, the first transition lottery is performed, and the lottery result management means maintains the lottery result of the first transition lottery, or the predetermined number of lottery results. When the rank game elapses, it is determined to shift to the advantageous state by the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state and the first transition lottery or the second transition lottery. Then, the advantageous state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning the state of playing the game to the advantageous state is provided, and the advantageous state transition means shifts to the advantageous state by the second transition lottery. When it is determined, the first transition lottery is shifted to an advantageous state which is more advantageous than the case where it is determined to be shifted to the advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state of a more advantageous ART state). And

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the lottery is shifted to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the first winning combination is determined as the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Transfer lottery. Then, the advantageous state lottery state is finished when the first transition lottery is carried out and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained, or when a predetermined number of unit games have passed. In the gaming machine that performs the lottery transition to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination as described above, some players may not be able to receive the first transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state at all. In the gaming machine, the second transfer lottery is carried out when a predetermined number of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, even if the push winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, it is possible to receive the transition lottery to the advantageous state without fail, so that the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. ..

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, the first transfer lottery is performed. When the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first transfer lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player will be interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state of transitioning through the second transition lottery is an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state of transitioning through the first transition lottery, so the player has the second symbol. A combination is displayed (the first transition lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is not ended), and it is desired that a predetermined number of unit games be passed, and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be maintained to the end. it can.

[Appendix 4]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  In addition, various measures have been taken so far to diversify the trigger for shifting to the advantageous state (ART). For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-126369), a specific combination (7 in BB) during a bonus is disclosed. A game machine is disclosed in which, if an internal winning is given to (matching), the state shifts to an advantageous state after the bonus ends.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems that Ming tries to solve]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the transition lottery to the advantageous state is performed based on one internal lottery result during the predetermined period (during the bonus), the game tends to be monotonous, and the expectation about the transition to the advantageous state. There was a problem that it was hard to hold. In addition, since the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the transition to the advantageous state is generally suppressed to a low level, it is not possible to have the expectation of winning within a predetermined period, and the transition to the advantageous state is triggered. There is also a possibility that the interest of the game for a predetermined period may be spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the start operation detecting means, and a predetermined combination from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stopping operation for stopping each reel. (For example, main control circuit 91), based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means, it is determined whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won. The winning state determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined condition (for example, the operation of the BB) are used as an opportunity to carry out a transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the above advantageous state. Game state control means (for example, main control circuit 91) that starts the state) and ends the advantageous state lottery state with a specific condition in the advantageous state lottery state (for example, that 59 medals are paid out). ), And when the game state control means ends the advantageous state lottery state, an advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that randomly determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state lottery means When the lottery is won, an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the state of playing the game to the advantageous state is provided, and the advantageous state lottery state is , A first lottery state having the lowest probability of winning the transfer lottery by the advantageous state lottery means (eg, BB mode 0), a second lottery state having the higher probability than the first lottery state (eg, BB mode 1) ), And a plurality of lottery states (for example, BB mode) including a third lottery state (for example, BB mode 2) in which the probability is higher than the first lottery state and the second lottery state. In the state lottery state, further comprises lottery state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that transits the plurality of lottery states based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery combination determination means, and the lottery state transition means. When it is determined as an internal winning combination of any of a first number of winning combinations including a first winning combination and a second winning combination of the plurality of winning combinations in the first random determination state, the second random determination is performed from the first random determination status. Lottery The lottery state is transited to, and in the second lottery state, any one of the second numbers smaller than the first number including the first winning combination and not including the second winning combination among the plurality of winning combinations is an internal winning combination. When determined as, the gaming machine is characterized by transitioning the lottery state from the second lottery state to the third lottery state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, at the end of the advantageous state lottery state, transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state, and a third lottery state with different probabilities of winning the transfer lottery, and the inside of the advantageous state lottery state. A plurality of lottery states are transitioned based on the winning combination. As a result, the probability of winning the transfer lottery based on the internal winning combination can be changed, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the advantageous state lottery state. The interest in the state lottery state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the second lottery state in which the probability of winning the transition lottery from the first lottery state is higher, one of the first winning combinations including the first winning combination and the second winning combination is internally won. When determined as a winning combination, a transition is made, and from the second random determination state to the third random determination state in which there is a higher probability of winning the transition random determination, the second number that is smaller than the first number that includes the first combination and does not include the second combination Transition is made when any of the winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination. As a result, as the lottery state transitions, the types of roles that trigger the transition to a higher lottery state will decrease, but the probability of winning the transition lottery along with the transition of the lottery state also increases, so the game It is possible to create a game mode in which the state is gradually upgraded. For the player, instead of being interested in one internal lottery result in the advantageous state lottery state, they are interested in a series of internal lottery results in the advantageous state lottery state, The interest in the lottery state can be enhanced.

[Appendix 5]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, since the game in the advantageous state tends to be monotonous, in recent years, attempts to diversify the game characteristics in the advantageous state have been widely made. For example, in a patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-152165), a free game is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of fighter symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on a liquid crystal display. There is disclosed a gaming machine having a variety of effects and payout forms by setting the remaining number of fighters on the player side of the shooting game displayed in the above effect.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the free game and the effect (shooting game) are automatically advanced under the control of the gaming machine side, the progress of the game by the player cannot be reflected in the effect contents. , The player could not actively participate in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in an advantageous state by allowing the player to actively participate in the game. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state advantageous for the player as compared with the normal state (for example, a battle ART in the ART gaming state) as a state in which a game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Rotating the reel based on the window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 64), and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for changing the above-mentioned symbol and the start operation detecting means, a plurality of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among the above, and a stop operation for stopping each reel, which is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels. Of the reel based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) to be activated, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means. In the advantageous state, winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not there is, advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. When a predetermined winning combination (for example, the pushing order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, a notification unit for notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, information for displaying a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts). (For example, the sub-control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11), prior to the start of the advantageous state, the first numerical value information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character). Numerical value determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining, and performance information (for example, performance) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the advantageous state. Production information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering (for example, set in the apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11) and first production information (for example, enemy ball) as the production information. When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which is registered, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and the second production information (for example, ally ball) as the production information. When the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which is registered, a numerical value updating unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts a second predetermined value from the second numerical information, and the numerical updating unit. As a result of the subtraction of, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and the advantageous state is newly started when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value (for example, A control circuit 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information are subtracted based on the effect information and the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, and the second numerical value is decreased before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. When the numerical information can be made less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the player's start operation, the player actively participates in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation for the game can be improved. ..

  Further, even when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the target to be subtracted (first numerical value information or second numerical value information) is different depending on the effect information registered in the game. For the player, since the first numerical value information is subtracted in the state where the first effect information is registered, the player does not want to win the predetermined combination, and conversely, when the second effect information is registered. Wants to win the predetermined role. Here, since the effect information is registered for a plurality of times of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the effect information registered in advance, The player wants to win the predetermined combination at an advantageous timing (the second effect information is registered). As a result, the registered effect information and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play the game with a sense of tension, so that the interest in the advantageous state can be improved. it can.

  Further, since the predetermined winning combination for subtracting the first numerical value information or the second numerical information is the notification target winning combination, the determination of the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination has an effect on the profit given during the advantageous state. Will be given. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the winning combination for which the first numerical value information is subtracted is the first winning combination (replay, etc.) that does not affect the profit, and the winning combination for which the second numerical value information is subtracted is the first winning combination that affects the profit. It is also possible to use two roles (bell etc.). In such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning of the second role affecting profits is directly linked to the continuation of the advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, by making the winning of the predetermined winning combination that affects profits advantageous / disadvantageous according to the registered performance information, the gaming property in the advantageous state is improved. It can be diversified and the interest in an advantageous state can be enhanced.

[Appendix 6]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to shift the gaming state based on winning or winning of a so-called rare combination such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in the patent document (JP 2013-048945 A), the RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when the cherries 1, 2 and 3 are determined as the internal winning combination are displayed during a predetermined period. Therefore, it is disclosed that the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the player's start operation, the operation of the player is reflected in the result of the game by shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, since so-called rare roles such as watermelons and cherries have a low winning probability, when a game state is changed depending on whether or not a rare role is won like a gaming machine of a patent document, some players even once during the period. There is a possibility that you may not get a chance, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline.

  On the other hand, although it is possible to consider the game playability of shifting the game state regardless of the operation of the player, in such a game machine, apart from the original game playability of the pachi-slot machine that progresses the game according to the operation of the player. Since the decision to affect the profit to be given is made, the pachi-slot machine is not suitable and the fairness of the game may be impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state rich in amusement while being associated with a result of a game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention, as a state in which a game is played, has an advantageous state (eg, ART gaming state) advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state (eg, normal gaming state) and the normal state, and the normal state. A gaming machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) with a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reel Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, , Symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping pin) Based on the detection of the start operation by the motor) and the start operation detection means, when the internal winning combination is determined, the first symbol combination (for example, the symbols displayed at the time of the correct answer to the pushing order) Combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed when the pressing order is incorrect) has a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a pressing combination (such as a pressing bell) that can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel (for example, , The main control circuit 91), the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, main control If a predetermined condition (for example, winning the apocalypse lottery) is satisfied in the circuit 91) and the normal state, a CZ lottery state (for example, a normal game state during apocalypse operation) for starting the transition lottery to the chance zone is started. During the lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the CZ lottery state, performance information in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead (For example, effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and confirmed balls), and the above-mentioned effective line on the effective line in the game in which the effect information is registered. When the symbol combination of 1 is displayed, the CZ lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the reel of FIG. 72) that performs the lottery to shift to the chance zone with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game. Based on the result of the lottery when the stop ART is selected) and the CZ lottery means, the game state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that shifts the game state to the chance zone, and the CZ lottery state. , When the push forward combination is determined a predetermined number of times as an internal winning combination (for example, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0), the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control time) that ends the CZ lottery state. 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on the effect information registered in advance for a predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, since the effect information is registered regardless of the operation of the player, simply changing the game state based on the effect information would impair suitability as a gaming machine and impair the fairness of the game. There is a risk that In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of the symbols displayed in the game is taken into account to shift the game state. Thereby, the player's operation can be intervened in the transition of the game state, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Here, the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the game state is a combination of symbols displayed when the push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so the rare combination described above is transferred to the game state. It is possible to give the player more opportunities to have a sense of expectation regarding the game state transition, as compared with the case of using the opportunity. In other words, in the first symbol combination that requires not only winning as an internal winning combination but also the order of stop operations, it is possible to set the winning probability higher than that of the rare winning combination, so that there is an opportunity to have an expectation (press It is possible to give a lot of normal winning combinations as internal winning combinations) and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state transition lottery is performed with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed, so that the player's operation is possible. The game state can be changed in various modes while being associated with the result of the accompanying game. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform the transition of the gaming state in a mode rich in game play while being associated with the result of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state is ended when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination a predetermined number of times during the CZ lottery state. In this way, by using the pushing forward combination that triggers the transition of the game state as the ending condition of the CZ lottery state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery during the CZ lottery state. As a result, it is possible for the player to avoid a situation where there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

[Appendix 7]
Pachi-slot 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed so as to transition to the ART state with high probability. .. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in a chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. As a winning combination, a gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability is disclosed.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In the gaming machine of such patent document, the interest of the player in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, an opportunity in which the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not get any chance, despite the fact that the player has moved to the chance zone, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol A predetermined variation from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the starting operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for changing the An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a ratio, and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel. (For example, main control circuit 91), based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means, it is determined whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the lottery state start for starting the advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing the transition lottery on whether or not to shift to the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as an opportunity. A means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a winning mode (for example, a CZ mode) that defines the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous state in the transition lottery, the unit game that has elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. A mode transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that makes a transition based on the number of times, and a predetermined winning combination (for example, a pushing order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means in the advantageous state lottery state. , An advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that performs the transfer lottery based on the current winning mode, and the advantageous state lottery means. When the transition lottery is performed, a lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state, and a game is performed when it is determined to shift to the advantageous state by the transition lottery. Advantageous state transition means for transitioning the state to the advantageous state (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), and, the mode transition means, based on the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state, the probability From the lowest first mode (e.g., CZ mode 0) to the second mode (e.g., CZ mode 1) having a higher probability than the first mode, and of the unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the mode is shifted to the third mode (for example, CZ mode 2) having the highest probability, and the lottery state start means is When the profit state lottery state is started, the mode transition means further comprises transition timing determination means (for example, CZ_MAP, sub-control circuit 101) for determining the number of unit games to transition from the first mode to the second mode. It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) for performing the transition lottery to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the transition lottery is triggered by the predetermined winning combination being determined as the internal winning combination. When the transfer lottery is performed, the advantageous state lottery state is ended. Here, in the gaming machine that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state at all, but the gaming machine according to the present invention Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the transition lottery increases, and it becomes easier to win the transition lottery. In such a gaming machine, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state. It is possible to improve the amusement during the advantageous state lottery state by making it possible to make the game playless.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games for shifting the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. As a result, the timing at which the winning mode is increased to the advantageous mode for the player is different for each advantageous state lottery state, so that the game in the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified, and the advantage state lottery state The interest can be improved.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is I couldn't sustain the player's expectations, focusing only on one game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the start operation detecting means, and a predetermined combination from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stopping operation for stopping each reel. (For example, main control circuit 91), based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means, it is determined whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, the enemy determination ART) that is performed subsequent to the first advantageous state (for example, the predetermined advantageous condition). Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state including the battle ART, and first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. ), And a second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, the first advantageous state control means during the first advantageous state. , A first effect information registration means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, and the effect information as a duplication. Second advantageous state starting means for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which any of several types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), the second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, the presentation information in the game a plurality of times from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead (for example, Second numerical value information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect balls, and first numerical value information (for example, for enemy games) in which second effect information (for example, enemy balls) is registered as the effect information. The HP of the teammate character) is subtracted from the first numerical value according to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state (for example, the attacking power of the enemy character), and as the effect information. Third production In the game in which the information (for example, ally ball) is registered, from the second numerical value information (for example, HP of the enemy character), the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state (for example, enemy) Numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts the second numerical value according to the character's defense power, and if the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means, the advantageous state is set. Advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that newly starts the first advantageous state when the second numerical value information is less than the threshold value.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will vary depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical value information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the game a plurality of times ahead, so that the player is interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , The interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is made to differ depending on the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game during the first advantageous state influences whether or not the advantageous state is continued. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state is repeated a plurality of times. It can be continued throughout the game. Further, by separately determining the subtraction amount (first numerical value) of the first numerical value information and the subtraction amount (second numerical value) of the second numerical value information, for example, the subtraction amount of the first numerical value information and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value information are both set. The amount of subtraction of the first numerical value information can be increased / decreased, the amount of subtraction of the first numerical value information can be decreased / increased, and the amount of subtraction of the second numerical value information can be decreased / increased. Can be converted. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is I couldn't sustain the player's expectations, focusing only on one game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the start operation detecting means, and a predetermined combination from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stopping operation for stopping each reel. (For example, main control circuit 91), based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means, it is determined whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, the enemy determination ART) that is performed subsequent to the first advantageous state (for example, the predetermined advantageous condition). Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state including the battle ART, and first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. ), And a second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, the first advantageous state control means during the first advantageous state. , A first effect information registration means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, and as the effect information, Numerical value adding means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that adds a predetermined number to the first numerical value information (for example, HP of the teammate character) in the game in which one effect information (for example, teammate ball) is registered; As a second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state in the game in which the second effect information (for example, boss ball) is registered. , The second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, the second effect to register the effect information (for example, effect balls) in the game a plurality of times from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. In the game in which the information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the third effect information (for example, an enemy ball) are registered as the effect information, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and The above Numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in the game in which the fourth effect information (for example, a team ball) is registered as the output information. ) And, as a result of the subtraction of the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold value, and the first advantageous state is newly started when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will vary depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical value information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the game a plurality of times ahead, so that the player is interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , The interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical value information that triggers the end of the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered during the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical value information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the first numerical value information from decreasing below the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game during the first advantageous state influences the continuation of the advantageous state. Can be sustained.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for continuing AT or ART is I couldn't sustain the player's expectations, focusing only on one game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state advantageous for the player as compared with the normal state (for example, a battle ART in the ART gaming state) as a state in which a game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Rotating the reel based on the window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 64), and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for changing the above-mentioned symbol and the start operation detecting means, a plurality of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among the above, and a stop operation for stopping each reel, which is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels. Of the reel based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) to be activated, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not there is, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger, and the advantageous state Prior to the start, a determining unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character), and , Effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a predetermined number of times ahead of the game, and the first effect information (as the effect information). For example, in a game in which an enemy ball is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and as the effect information, second effect information (for example, a ally ball) is registered in the game. In the technique, a numerical value updating unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information, and the advantageous state when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value updating unit. And the advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that newly starts the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. When the first effect information is continuously registered a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) as the effect information in the game, the second effect information is used as the effect information subsequent to the first effect information that is continuous a specific number of times. It is characterized by registering.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state continues depends on the game result of a plurality of games. It will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical value information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the game a plurality of times ahead, so that the player is interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , The interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first effect information that triggers the end of the advantageous state is continuously registered a specific number of times, the second effect that serves as an opportunity to continue the advantageous state as subsequent effect information. Register the information. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unfavorable situation for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game in the advantageous state at ease.

[Appendix 11]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  As such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that informs advantageous information to a player so that a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075738), when a bonus combination that is carried over as an internal winning combination is carried over when the power is cut off until a corresponding combination of symbols is displayed, the power supply after the power is cut off. There is disclosed a gaming machine that notifies that a bonus role has been carried over at the time of restarting by re-input.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, the bonus starts immediately when the power is turned on, so there is a problem that the fairness among the players is impaired. In addition, in gaming machines, it is common to clear information about the game once when changing the settings, so for example, the game is ended with the bonus combination carried over the day before, and the notification is given the next day. By confirming whether the set value is displayed or not, the player can know whether the set value has changed from the previous day or has not changed. Being able to know whether or not the set value has been changed in this way not only impairs fairness among the players, but also may damage the interest of the player if the player determines that the setting is low. There is a nature.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness among players.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (example: For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. On the basis of the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) And the production information registration for registering production information (for example, lottery balls 1 to 4 and production balls such as fixed balls) in the game a plurality of times from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. When a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the game in which the means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the effect information are registered, based on the effect information registered in the game. Privilege giving means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for giving a privilege, power-on detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101, power supply board 44b) for detecting power-on, and the power-on detection The acquisition means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the sub-control circuit 101, the power supply board 44b) for acquiring the date and time when the means detects the power-on, and the effect information registration means are based on the date and time acquired by the acquisition means. The registered effect information is discarded, and effect information in a plurality of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the registered effect information is rewritten to new effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on. From the date and time when the power is turned on, for example, it is the time before business hours in the game shop, and by comparing with the date and time when the power is turned off, it is known that it is before business the next day. Therefore, by rewriting the production information based on the date and time when the power was turned on, the production information registered when the power was turned off the previous day will always be different from the production information registered when the power was turned on the next day. The player cannot grasp the presence / absence of a change in the set value from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players.

  Here, since this effect information is used for the transition lottery to the advantageous state by the transition lottery means, it is possible to further ensure fairness among the players. That is, for example, even if performance information with a high (or low) expectation of transition to an advantageous state is registered when the power is turned off the previous day, the performance information is rewritten to new performance information when the power is turned on the next day. It is possible to prevent unfair treatment between a player who is aware of the above and a player who is not.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the rewriting of the performance information is controlled based on the date and time when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power has to be temporarily turned off during business, before and after the power is turned off. The status of the gaming machine can be maintained. For the player, even if the power is temporarily cut off when the production information that is advantageous to the player is registered, the advantageous production information is maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play games without feeling.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a power cut detection means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a sub control circuit 101, a power supply board 44b) for detecting a power cut, and the acquisition means is the power cut detection. The means acquires the date and time when the power is cut off, and the time from when the power is turned off to when the power is turned on is acquired from the date and time when the power is turned off and the time when the power is turned on. When the time acquired by the acquisition unit is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), the effect information registration unit maintains the registered effect information, and the time acquired by the acquisition unit is equal to or more than the predetermined time. In this case, the registered effect information is discarded and effect information for a plurality of times of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, if the time from turning off the power to turning on the power again is a predetermined time or more, the registered effect information is rewritten to new effect information. As a result, the player who plays the game the next day cannot know whether or not the setting value has been changed from the registered effect information, and the fairness among the players is not impaired. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the time from turning off the power to turning on the power again is less than the predetermined time, the registered effect information is maintained without being rewritten. As a result, even if the power is temporarily cut off when the production information that is advantageous to the player is registered, the advantageous production information is maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play games without feeling dissatisfied.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect information registration means discards the registered effect information and newly registers effect information in a plurality of games, the effect information determined by lottery is newly added. It is characterized in that it is registered as various performance information.

  As a method to make it difficult to know whether or not the set value has been changed, it is possible to set the production information to the initial state when the power is turned on the next day, but with such a method, the situation is the same in multiple gaming machines. Therefore, the variety of games will be diminished. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, new effect information is registered by lottery when the power is turned on the next day, and thus it is possible to secure variety of games, which is preferable.

[Appendix 12]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, there has been known a gaming machine which informs a player of information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize a gaming state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by carrying out in (1).

  Here, in the gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is widely known that the combination of symbols displayed in accordance with the stop operation of the player is different, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In, for example, when the first combination of symbols is displayed as the result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the second combination of symbols is displayed as the result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. A game machine that does not do so is also known.

  In the gaming machine that controls the game state according to the symbol combination displayed in this way, the player can avoid the sub-control board from recognizing that the symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. It is known that cheating, such as command spills, that gains unreasonable profit. For example, in the case of the gaming machine described above, when a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, by making it impossible to obtain a command including information about the displayed symbol combination on the sub-control board side, It can be avoided that the player is in a disadvantageous state, and as a result, the player will get an unreasonable profit.

  Therefore, if an illegal act is performed by a player during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a gaming machine that notifies the occurrence of the error is It is already known (for example, refer to Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-059616)). In such a gaming machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decorative lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and let a clerk in the amusement hall notice that a fraudulent act is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally gaining the profit of the game because the illegal action that induces the sequence error is executed.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine, a game is played by performing a stop operation three times after the operation of the start lever, so the order of commands to be transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. Therefore, by confirming the order of the commands acquired by the sub control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine as described above, when the liquid crystal display device is not mounted, even if the notification of the sequence error is executed by the sound and the decoration lamp, it is confused with the effect of other gaming machines in the gaming hall. Therefore, there is a problem in that the production of notifying the clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted to the clerk, and the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by the cheating.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing illegal gain of a game by illegal acts.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Therefore, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And a start operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by a player, and the reel is rotated on condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detecting means, a predetermined probability is selected from a plurality of winning combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination and a stop operation detecting means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel ( For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a lottery state starting means for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a transitional lottery on whether or not to shift to the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the advantageous state lottery for performing the transition lottery for determining with a predetermined probability that the advantageous state is to be shifted to the advantageous state when a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), in the advantageous state lottery state, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the lottery state ending means for ending the advantageous state lottery state (for example, the sub-control) Circuit 101) and game state control means for shifting the game state to the advantageous state based on the result of the transfer lottery of the advantageous state lottery means (for example, a sub control circuit) 101) and a game order determination means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for determining the progress order of one game, the lottery state ending means, the game order determination means the game progresses in a predetermined order. When it is determined that the advantageous state is not determined (for example, when a sequence error occurs), the advantageous state lottery state is terminated.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) that starts with a predetermined condition as an opportunity, the advantage state lottery state ends with a predetermined number of unit games that end. (2) Since the lottery for granting rights is performed, it is possible to realize a so-called completion-type chance zone in which the lottery is performed in an advantageous state when the race is completed. Since this advantageous state lottery state ends when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in hope that the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in order to avoid the end.

  Also, if a predetermined symbol combination is displayed during the advantageous state lottery state, the advantageous state lottery state will be terminated, but if the displayed symbol combination is zeroed out due to fraud (cannot be grasped), The advantageous state lottery state is temporarily maintained. In this respect, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and terminates the advantageous state lottery state when the progress has not progressed in the predetermined order, whereby the game is played. Even if the progress result of (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is zeroed, the advantageous state lottery state will not be unjustly maintained, and the player will obtain unjust profits due to fraud It is possible to prevent that.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state lottery means, when the internal winning combination determination means determines an internal winning combination as a combination capable of displaying the predetermined symbol combination, the advantageous state is transferred to the advantageous state. It is characterized by further performing a transfer lottery determined with a specific probability.

  In a game in which a winning combination capable of displaying a predetermined symbol combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the advantageous state lottery state may end due to the displaying of the predetermined symbol combination, but the transition to the advantageous state You can take more lottery. This transition lottery is performed when the relevant winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore, the more the advantageous state lottery state continues, the more frequently it is performed. Therefore, when the game progress result is zero and the displayed symbol combination cannot be grasped, it is possible to unreasonably receive lottery to shift to the advantageous state triggered by the winning combination. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the advantageous state lottery state is ended regardless of the symbol combination, so that the player may obtain an unjust profit by fraud. Can be prevented.

[Appendix 13]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time. Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2012-147803 A), AT is determined according to an internal winning combination including a bonus. There has been proposed a gaming machine that determines the period of ART and the number of assist games (the number of assist games).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game becomes monotonous and the player may get tired. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method that has not existed in the past with regard to the method of determining the period such as AT.

  The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the number and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91), and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to cause the symbol display means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbols, and the effect provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the line, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that follows the first advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and the first The second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states is provided, and the first advantageous state control means is advantageous with the first effect information (for example, ally ball). A predetermined number (for example, 6) of a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including a plurality of types of second effect information (for example, boss balls 1-8) having different state continuation expectations Determines performance information and performs Production information storage means (for example, sub RAM 103) to store the effect information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) and a predetermined number of effect information stored in the effect information storage means that is less than a predetermined number. The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) that displays the number (for example, 5) of the effect information as the effect information in the specific number of games including the current game, and the first effect information as the effect information in the current game. In the displayed game, the numerical value addition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for adding the first predetermined value to the first numerical value information (for example, the HP of the teammate character) and the internal winning combination determination means are the specific winning combinations (for example, , Rare combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific combination rewriting unit (for example, an auxiliary system) that rewrites the second effect information stored in the effect information storage unit into the first effect information. Circuit 101) and a game in which any one of a plurality of types of second effect information is registered as effect information in the current game, the first advantageous state is ended, and the second advantageous state is started. State starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means is registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the first numerical value information according to the first condition. The first specific value corresponding to the type of effect information is subtracted, and the second effect registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical value information (for example, HP of the enemy character) according to the second condition. Numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second specific value according to the type of information, and the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means. , The second numerical information is Continuation control means for continuing a beneficial state goes below serial threshold (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends in the second advantageous state when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value first, and the second numerical value information becomes the threshold value first. Since it continues when the value becomes less than 1, the larger the value of the first numerical value information, the easier it is for the advantageous state to continue, and the period of the advantageous state extends. The value of the first numerical value information is added in the game in which the first effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the second effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical value information is performed ends and the second advantage in which the first numerical value information is subtracted. It will shift to the state. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, not only the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the internal winning combination, but the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game, The player pays attention to not only the internal winning combination but also the effect information that is currently displayed, so that the control of the period in the advantageous state can be made rich in playability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, the second effect information that ends the first advantageous state is rewritten to the first effect information. By rewriting the second effect information to the first effect information, it becomes possible to expect that the first numerical value information will be added thereafter. Therefore, the player can obtain not only the effect information displayed but also the effect information displayed. We will also pay attention to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to make the control of the period in the advantageous state more rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific winning combination rewriting means is one of the specific second numbers in which the expected degree of continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined value, out of the specific number of effect information in the game displayed on the display means. The production information is maintained without being rewritten to the first production information.

  As described above, the larger the first numerical value information, the easier it is for the advantageous state to continue. On the other hand, the plurality of types of second effect information have different expectation of continuation of the advantageous state. When the 2 advantageous state is started, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue thereafter. If such second advantageous effect information that is easy to continue is rewritten to the first effect information, it may be difficult to continue the advantageous condition. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific second effect information for which the expectation of continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information. Thereby, the determination of the period of the advantageous state can be made more entertaining.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific role rewriting means is the first effect information for the specific second effect information stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means. It is characterized by rewriting to.

  In such a gaming machine, the specific second effect information which is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information is limited to those which are being displayed on the display means, and those which are simply stored without being displayed are the first. Rewrite as 1 production information. Since the player cannot grasp the effect information that is not displayed, by rewriting such effect information to the first effect information, the profit obtained by the player can be obtained without making the player dissatisfied. Balance can be achieved.

[Appendix 14]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time. Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2012-147803 A), AT is determined according to an internal winning combination including a bonus. There has been proposed a gaming machine that determines the period of ART and the number of assist games (the number of assist games).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game becomes monotonous and the player may get tired. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method that has not existed in the past with regard to the method of determining the period such as AT.

  The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the number and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91), and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to cause the symbol display means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbols, and the effect provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the line, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that follows the first advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and the first The second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, and, the first advantageous state control means, a plurality of types of effects different in expectation of continuation of the advantageous state Performance information that determines a predetermined number (for example, 6) of effect information (for example, effect balls) from the information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) and stores it in effect information storage means (for example, sub RAM 103). Noboru The recording means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a specific number (for example, 5) of effect information smaller than a predetermined number among the predetermined number of effect information stored in the effect information storage means are stored in the current game. When the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying as the effect information in the specific number of games including, and the internal winning combination determining means determines the specific winning combination (for example, the winning combination relating to BB) as the internal winning combination, A profit state rewriting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that rewrites one or a plurality of effect information stored in the storage means to new effect information, and a game in which predetermined effect information is displayed as effect information in the current game. When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the push-order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state is ended and the second advantageous state is started. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), the second advantageous state control means, according to the first condition (for example, when the push order bell wins when the enemy ball is set) from the first numerical information first The first specific value according to the type of effect information registered at the end of the advantageous state is subtracted, and according to the second condition (for example, the pushing order bell win when the ally ball is set) second numerical information From the numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second specific value corresponding to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, and the subtraction result of the numerical subtracting means, Continuation control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that terminates the advantageous state when the numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value and continues the advantageous state when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends in the second advantageous state when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value first, and the second numerical value information becomes the threshold value first. Continues when less than. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed according to the type of effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, the effect information displayed during the first advantageous state is: It will affect the duration of the favorable state. Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game, not the period of the advantageous state is simply controlled based on the internal winning combination. The player pays attention to not only the internal winning combination but also the effect information that is currently displayed, so that the control of the period in the advantageous state can be made rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, one or a plurality of performance information stored in the performance information storage unit is rewritten with new performance information. .. As a result, when the effect information is rewritten to the effect information having a high expectation of continuation, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and conversely, when the effect information is rewritten to the effect information having a low expectation of continuation. Since the situation is disadvantageous for the player, the player pays attention to not only the displayed effect information but also the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to make the control of the period in the advantageous state more rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit status rewriting means is, in the performance information in a specific number of games displayed on the display means, specific performance information in which a degree of expectation of continuation of an advantageous state is a predetermined value or more. Is maintained without being rewritten to new effect information.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the specific effect information having a continuation expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten to another effect information. As a result, when there is specific effect information in the specified number of effect information that is being displayed, the player is given the opportunity to benefit from the specific effect information, so the player expects After that, you can play the game and the interest in the game will improve.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means rewrites the specific effect information stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means with new effect information. Is characterized by.

  In such a gaming machine, the specific effect information to be maintained without being rewritten to another effect information is limited to the one currently being displayed on the display means, and a different effect is only applied to one that is simply stored without being displayed. Rewrite as information. Since the production information that is not displayed cannot be grasped by the player, by rewriting such production information to another production information, the profit obtained by the player can be obtained without making the player dissatisfied. Balance can be achieved.

[Appendix 15]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time. Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2012-147803 A), AT is determined according to an internal winning combination including a bonus. There has been proposed a gaming machine that determines the period of ART and the number of assist games (the number of assist games).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game becomes monotonous and the player may get tired. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method that has not existed in the past with regard to the method of determining the period such as AT.

  The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the number and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91), and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to cause the symbol display means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbols, and the effect provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the line, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that follows the first advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and the first The second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, and, the first advantageous state control means, a plurality of types of different different expectation of continuation of the advantageous state. A lottery that defines lottery value information (for example, boss MAP data) for determining effect information from a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including one effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8). Emotion Lottery information storage means (for example, ROM cartridge board 76) that stores a plurality of information (for example, boss MAP), and one lottery information of the plurality of lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means, the production information. While determining as lottery information for determining, when the production information is determined based on the one lottery information, the lottery information for determining the production information is updated from the one lottery information to another lottery information. Based on the lottery information determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the boss MAP lottery table) and the lottery information determined by the lottery information determination means, effects in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a predetermined number of times ahead of the game. One of a plurality of types of first effect information is registered as the effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that determines information and the effect information in the current game. When a specific condition is satisfied in the game being played (for example, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state is ended, and the second advantageous state is started. The means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the second advantageous state control means continue the advantageous state based on the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. Continuation control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling whether or not, the lottery information storage means, as the lottery value information for determining the first effect information, the expected continuation degree of the advantageous state. Stores special lottery information (for example, boss MAP52) that prescribes only special first effect information (for example, boss balls 7 and 8) equal to or more than a predetermined value, and the lottery information determination means draws lottery for determining effect information. As information When determining the special lottery information, without updating from the special lottery information to other lottery information, and maintains a special lottery information.

  In such a gaming machine, a plurality of types of first effect information having different expectation of continuation of the advantageous state are provided, and the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state Based on this, whether or not the advantageous state is continued is controlled. For the player, he / she will have a strong interest in the type of effect information that is currently displayed, and compared to the conventional gaming machine that controls the period during the advantageous state simply based on the internal winning combination, The control of the period in the advantageous state can be rich in game play.

  Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect information to be registered for a predetermined game from among a plurality of types of effect information is determined based on the lottery information, and the lottery information is newly updated every time the effect information is determined. Update to lottery information. The lottery information includes special lottery information that determines only the first special production information with the expected degree of continuation of the advantageous state being a predetermined value or more as the first production information that triggers the end of the first advantageous state. Once the lottery information is updated to the special lottery information once, the special lottery information is maintained without being updated from this special lottery information to other lottery information. As a result, once the special lottery information is updated, only the special first effect information having a high expectation of continuation in the advantageous state is determined as the first effect information, so that the player can change the effect information. The lottery information for deciding is also paid attention to, and the control of the period in the advantageous state can be made more entertaining.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation control means of the second advantageous state control means has first numerical value information (for example, when the pushing order bell is won when the enemy ball is set) (for example, when the enemy ball is set). , The HP of the ally character), a first specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state is subtracted, and the second condition (for example, the pressing order when the ally ball is set) Numerical value subtraction means for subtracting a second specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in accordance with the bell winning ( For example, as a result of the subtraction by the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and the advantageous state is continued when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Continuation control means (eg, Control circuit 101), and the special lottery information (for example, boss MAP52, 53), the special first effect information and the second effect information (for example, ally ball) from a plurality of types of effect information. The lottery value information is stipulated so that the first advantageous state control means adds the first predetermined value to the first numerical value information in the game in which the second effect information is determined as the effect information in the current game. It is characterized by further comprising a numerical addition means (for example, the sub control circuit 101).

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends in the second advantageous state when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value first, and the second numerical value information becomes the threshold value first. Continues when less than. In this case, by defining the lottery value information about the second effect information that will add the first numerical value information to the above-mentioned special lottery information, it is advantageous once the special lottery information is updated. Only the special first effect information having a high expectation of continuation of the state or the second effect information to which the first numerical value information is added is determined. As a result, when the special first effect information is determined, the degree of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state is increased as described above, and when the second effect information is determined, the first numerical value information increases with the first numerical value information. Since it becomes difficult for the 1-numerical value information to be reduced to less than the threshold value, the degree of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state also increases. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, after the special lottery information is once updated, the player can expect that the advantageous state will continue, so that the player determines the effect information. The lottery information for playing will be also focused on, and the control of the period in the advantageous state can be made rich in playability.

[Appendix 16]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been made to make the player have an expectation regarding the continuation of AT and ART. For example, in Patent Document (JP-A-04-045992), AT and ART are continued. There has been proposed a gaming machine that maintains a sense of expectation over a plurality of games by informing whether or not to play the game by the result of the battle production.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the battle effect in the conventional game machine like the patent document, the winning / losing result is predetermined by the continuous lottery performed at the time of the start of the battle effect, so that the player is interested in the effect content of the battle effect. Instead of heading, the focus will only be on the outcome of the game, and the battle production itself may be unattractive.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period such as an AT by a method having a high level of playability.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the number and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91), and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to cause the symbol display means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbols, and the effect provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the line, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won ( For example, the main control circuit 91), an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that starts the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger, the first effect information (for example, an enemy ball), and the second effect. From a plurality of types of effect information (eg, effect balls) including information (eg, ally balls), effect information to be registered for a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead with a predetermined probability. The first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information (for example, the HP of the teammate character) in the game in which the first effect information is registered as the effect information registration means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to be determined. Also, in the game in which the second effect information is registered as the effect information, a numerical value subtracting unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 10) that subtracts the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character). 1) and, as a result of the subtraction of the numerical value subtracting means, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical value information becomes less than a threshold value, and the advantageous state is newly started when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value. As a result of the subtraction of the state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical subtraction means, when the first numerical information becomes less than the change threshold value, the performance information registration means registers the first performance information with the performance information. And a probability changing unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that changes the probability determined as.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information falls below the threshold value first, and continues when the second numerical value information falls below the threshold value first. .. Here, the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the type of registered effect information, the first numerical value information is subtracted in the game in which the first effect information is registered, The second numerical value information is subtracted in the game in which the two effect information is registered. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation of the advantageous state is controlled based on the type of the effect information registered. As a result, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which the presence or absence of continuation is predetermined, the gaming machine according to the present invention has different presence or absence of continuation in accordance with the flow of the game in the advantageous state, and thus the advantageous state. The control of the period can be made rich in game play.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first numerical value information becomes less than the change threshold value, the probability of determining the first effect information as the effect information to be registered is changed. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult for the first effect information to be determined, and thereafter it becomes difficult for the first numerical value information to be subtracted, and the advantageous state is likely to continue. On the contrary, for example, when the first effect information is easily determined, the first numerical value information is easily subtracted thereafter, and it becomes difficult to continue the advantageous state. In this way, by changing the probability of determining the effect information based on the value of the first numerical value information, it is possible to make the control of the period of the advantageous state more rich in playability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an opponent determining means (for example, a subordinate) for determining one attribute information from a plurality of types of attribute information (for example, the type of enemy character) associated with the second numerical value information. If the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means is the first attribute information, the probability changing means changes the probability to the first probability, and the probability determining means controls the probability changing means. When the determined attribute information is the second attribute information, the probability is changed to a second probability different from the first probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the changed probability of determining the effect information varies depending on the type of the attribute information associated with the second numerical value information. Therefore, for example, depending on the opponent in the battle effect. The changed probability can be different. As a result, even if the first numerical information is reduced to the change threshold value and the advantageous state is about to end, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is easy for the opponent to reverse in the battle effect. Can be made more entertaining.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the change threshold that triggers the probability changing means to change the probability is different according to the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the change threshold varies depending on the type of the attribute information associated with the second numerical value information. Therefore, for example, the probability of determining the effect information according to the opponent in the battle effect is determined. The timing of making changes can be different. As a result, for example, various timings can be set in the battle effect at which reverse rotation easily occurs, so that the control of the period in the advantageous state can be further enhanced in playability.

[Appendix 17]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine is known in which various decorative members (for example, movable accessory) are provided in the gaming machine, and the decorative member is moved in accordance with the progress of the game to enhance the game playability. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-237715 discloses a gaming machine that notifies a player of an internal winning combination by operating a movable winning combination based on the result of the internal lottery. There is.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, the movable accessory is merely operated to notify the result of the internal lottery, and the player is gradually tired of the notification contents because the notification content is too easy to understand. There was a risk that interest in character goods would fade. When the player's interest is diminished, the operating rate of the game machine is also reduced. Therefore, a game machine provided with a movable accessory is required to be devised so as not to lose interest in the movable accessory.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing a game without making the player tired.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has, as a state in which a game is played, a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state (for example, a CZ or ART gaming state). It is a machine, and the production information to be used in a predetermined game is registered from among a plurality of production information (for example, production balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and confirmed balls) with different expectations regarding the transition to the advantageous state. Information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) and display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 11) that displays the registered effect information when a predetermined condition (for example, apocalypse operation) is satisfied in the normal state. And, in the game in which the display means is displaying the effect information, a transfer lottery means (eg, a sub-lottery means for performing a transfer lottery to the advantageous state based on the displayed effect information) Control circuit 101), based on the result of the transfer lottery of the transfer lottery means, the game state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that shifts the game state to the advantageous state, and a movable type capable of performing a predetermined operation. The accessory (for example, the rotary accessory 200), the accessory control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the rotary accessory control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory to emit light. A light emitting device (for example, an LED provided behind the eyeball main body 203), and a light emission control means for controlling light emission of the light emitting device (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, control of an LED provided behind the eyeball main body 203). Board), and a winning accessory movable lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining whether or not to operate the movable winning object in a game in which the display means does not display the effect information, and the winning combination Movable If the lottery means determines to operate the movable accessory, the promotion lottery means for performing the promotion lottery to determine whether or not the registered effect information is rewritten to effect information having a higher degree of expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), the effect information registration means, based on the result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery means, rewrites the registered effect information, the accessory control means, When the accessory movable lottery means determines that the movable accessory is operated, the movable accessory is operated, and the light emission control means is configured such that the accessory control means is based on the determination result of the accessory movable lottery. The light emitting device is controlled to emit light based on the result of the promotion lottery by the promotion lottery means when the movable type accessory is operated.

  In such a gaming machine, when the movable accessory is operated, promotion lottery of the effect information used for the transition lottery in the advantageous state is performed. Here, in the game in which the display means displays the effect information, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state is performed based on the displayed effect information, so the player has a strong interest in the promotion lottery of the effect information. I will hug you. On the other hand, the movable lottery operates based on the determination result of the movable lottery means when the display means does not display the effect information, and therefore the promotion lottery is hidden by the hidden means not displayed on the display means. It will be done for the information provided. By notifying that the hidden lottery is being promoted by using a movable accessory, the situation is advantageous for the player (winning the promotion lottery). You will continue to have expectations about what you are doing and will continue playing without getting tired. Further, by controlling the light emission of the light emitting device according to the result of the promotion lottery, it is possible to infer an expectation that the situation is advantageous from the light emission (for example, color) of the movable accessory, If it can be inferred that it is advantageous, the player will have a strong interest in the subsequent game, so that the player can continue the game without getting tired.

[Appendix 18]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

  A gaming machine equipped with such an AT (ART) function may perform AT lottery whether or not to perform AT during a bonus game, and may announce the result of the AT lottery at the end of the bonus game. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-183284), when the remaining payout number becomes 16 to 30 during the bonus game, the bonus game may end in the remaining 2 games. Has proposed a gaming machine that switches the image display to a challenge notification screen that notifies whether or not an AT (ART) is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, since the number of medals awarded during the bonus game varies depending on the internal winning combination, depending on the internal winning combination after switching the image display to the challenge notification screen, the remaining number of medals awarded will remain. May not reach. In such a case, if the presence or absence of the winning of the AT is notified as in Patent Document 1, the process at the end of the bonus game will be executed even if the bonus game is not finished, It will give the player a sense of distrust.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately informing the player of the end of a state advantageous to the player such as a bonus. To do.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine in which the maximum value of the number of game media provided in a unit game is a predetermined number, and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reel, and a start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for detecting a start operation by the player. , A start switch 64), and a symbol changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, and the start operation detecting means. The internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the plurality of combinations. Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided to detect a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation detecting means Reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the operation is detected, and When the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines whether or not a prize has been won, and the internal winning combination determination means that determines the winning determination means. When it is determined that the internal winning combination is won, the profit giving means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that gives the number of game media according to the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line, and the predetermined condition are set. A profit state starting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for starting a profit state (for example, a bonus state) as a trigger, and a counting means for counting the number of game media given by the profit giving means during the profit state (for example, , A main control circuit 91), and a profit state ending unit (for example, main control circuit 91) that ends the profit state when the number of game media counted by the counting unit exceeds a threshold value (for example, 59). Production control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that controls the production performed during the profit state, and the production control means is based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. When the number of game media counted by the counting means at the detection timing exceeds a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold value, a profit state end effect as an effect at the end of the game according to the detected start operation. The number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold value as a result of the game media being added by the profit giving means in the game corresponding to the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. If the number of game media counted by the counting means is less than or equal to the threshold value, the registered profit state end effect is executed, and the registered profit state end effect is changed to the profit state. The present invention is characterized in that it is changed to continuous production and the profit state continuous production is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, when the number of game media provided in the profit state may exceed the threshold value at the timing when the start operation is detected, the profit state end effect is produced as the effect at the end of the game. Register in advance. At this time, depending on the number of game media actually given in the game, the number of game media given in the profit state may not exceed the threshold value. Therefore, in the game machine according to the present invention, Based on the result of the addition of the game medium, the registered profit state end effect is changed to the profit condition continuous effect. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, at the start of the game in which the profit state may end, the profit state end effect is registered once, but as a result of the game, if the profit state does not end, The profit state continuation effect is executed without executing the profit state end effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production at the end of the profit state from being executed even though the profit state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the profit state. ..

[Appendix 19]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

  There is also known a gaming machine which informs the player of information advantageous to the player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination together with the replay time. It should be noted that informing the player of information that is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (performing navigation), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). A gaming machine that performs AT during the replay time may be called an ART machine or the like.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In recent years, gaming machines that perform AT during the above-mentioned RT between flags are also known. In such a gaming machine, if the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is won, the RT between the flags ends, so the player performs the stop operation so that the bonus does not win, and the game is played. Will be done. By the way, since the knowledge about the gaming machine differs depending on the player, in a gaming machine that requires a predetermined stop operation during the RT between flags, a player who has little knowledge about the gaming machine may be disadvantaged. For example, for a player who has knowledge of a gaming machine, a player can play while maintaining RT between flags by performing a stop operation so that a bonus is not won, but a player who does not have knowledge of a gaming machine However, there is a possibility that a bonus may be won without performing this stop operation, and in this case, as a result of the RT between flags ending, the player may be disadvantaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the disadvantages to a player who has no knowledge of the gaming machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (example: For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, the main control circuit 91) When the winning determination means determines that the specific combination has won, the profit state is started, and when the end condition is satisfied in the profit state, the profit state is ended. Profit control means (for example, the main control circuit 91), a low RT state (for example, RT2) in which a replay related to a replay is unlikely to be determined as the internal winning combination, and the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. RT control means (for example, main control circuit 91) that controls the transition of the game state between a high RT state (for example, RT4) whose probability of occurrence is higher than the low RT state, and a predetermined condition (for example, ART). Advantageous in providing game media, including a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that is performed subsequent to the first advantageous state, triggered by a lottery) Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for shifting the effect state related to the game to the advantageous state (for example, the ART gaming state) where the information of the stop operation is notified, and the first advantage First advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the state, and second advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. And, when the predetermined winning combination (for example, a winning combination relating to JACIN) is determined as an internal winning combination during the profit state, the RT control means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state, and the profit state. When a symbol combination (for example, C_JACIN1 to C_JACIN3) corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed by the symbol display means, the game state is shifted to a low RT state, and the advantageous state start means is used for the profit state. If the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of, the effect state is shifted to the advantageous state after the profit state is finished, and the first advantageous state control means is configured to perform the first existence. During the state, a first effect information registration unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, and as the effect information. Numerical value adding means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to the first numerical value information (for example, HP of the teammate character) in the game in which the first effect information (for example, ally ball) is registered; Second advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control) for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in the game in which the second effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered as information. Circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, the second effect information registration for registering effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. In the game in which means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and third effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and the effect is also performed. Numerical value subtracting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information in the game in which the fourth effect information (for example, ally ball) is registered, and subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means. As a result, when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is ended, and when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value, the continuous control means that newly starts the first advantageous state (for example, the sub control circuit). 101) and is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during a profit state, the state shifts to a high RT state, but when a combination of symbols corresponding to this predetermined winning combination is displayed, it shifts to a low RT state. Will end up. Therefore, a player who has knowledge about a gaming machine can maintain a high RT state by playing a game while avoiding a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, but has no knowledge about a gaming machine. The player may display a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination and fall from the high RT state to the low RT state.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an advantageous state in which information of advantageous stop operation regarding application of the game medium is notified. This advantageous state ends when the first numerical value information of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information falls below the threshold value first, and continues when the second numerical value information falls below the threshold value first. Therefore, the value of the first numerical information affects the duration of the advantageous state, and the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is performed extends the duration of the advantageous state. It can be said that it is a chance period.

  Here, the advantageous state is executed depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state, (whether the RT state is low or high). It is executed (regardless of whether it is in the RT state). Therefore, even if a player who has no knowledge of the gaming machine falls to the low RT state during the profit state, a chance period (first advantageous state) for extending the duration of the advantageous state after the profit state ends. ) Can be performed, and the disadvantage to a player who has no knowledge of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Appendix 20]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs the player of information advantageous to the player so that the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is not lost. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize a gaming state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by carrying out in (1).

  Here, in the gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is widely known that the combination of symbols displayed in accordance with the stop operation of the player is different, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In, for example, when the first combination of symbols is displayed as the result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the second combination of symbols is displayed as the result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. A game machine that does not do so is also known.

  In the gaming machine that controls the game state according to the symbol combination displayed in this way, the player can avoid the sub-control board from recognizing that the symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. It is known that cheating, such as command spills, that gains unreasonable profit. For example, in the case of the gaming machine described above, when a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, by making it impossible to obtain a command including information about the displayed symbol combination on the sub-control board side, It can be avoided that the player is in a disadvantageous state, and as a result, the player will get an unreasonable profit.

  Therefore, if an illegal act is performed by a player during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a gaming machine that notifies the occurrence of the error is It is already known (for example, refer to Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-059616)). In such a gaming machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decorative lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and let a clerk in the amusement hall notice that a fraudulent act is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally gaining the profit of the game because the illegal action that induces the sequence error is executed.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine, a game is played by performing a stop operation three times after the operation of the start lever, so the order of commands to be transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. Therefore, by confirming the order of the commands acquired by the sub control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine as described above, when the liquid crystal display device is not mounted, even if the notification of the sequence error is executed by the sound and the decoration lamp, it is confused with the effect of other gaming machines in the gaming hall. Therefore, there is a problem in that the production of notifying the clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted to the clerk, and the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by the cheating.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing illegal gain of a game by illegal acts.

[Means for solving the problem]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a low probability that a replay related to a replay will be determined as an internal winning combination (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state) and a probability that the replay is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a higher RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and the reels Symbol display means (for example, the display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed symbols, and start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 16S) for detecting the start operation by the player, On the condition that a start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, a symbol variation means (for example, a main control circuit) that varies the symbol by rotating the reel. 1) and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, Corresponding to each reel, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stop switch 64) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an inside determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Based on the winning combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel ( For example, based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means, the effectiveness provided in the symbol display means When the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the combination of symbols stopped on the in and the predetermined conditions are satisfied during the normal state (for example, when the RT4 shift lip is displayed), the normal state From RT starting means (for example, main control circuit 91) that shifts the game state to the high RT state from the high RT state when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high RT state. When the game state is transferred to the normal state and it is determined that the specific symbol combination is stopped, RT ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that maintains the high RT state, and the normal state or the high state. If the first lottery (for example, a lottery to move to ART) is won in the RT state, a special effect state (for example, ART game state) that informs advantageous stop operation information regarding the effect state regarding the game The probability of winning in the first lottery when the specific effect state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) to be moved to and the second lottery (for example, the avoidance point lottery) performed in the high RT state are won. There is a high probability state (for example, a high probability game state) and a high probability state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), and it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high probability state. , A low-probability state transition means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning to a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is low, and a game order determination means (for example, a sub-control) for determining the progression order of one game. Circuit 101), and the low probability state transition means, when the game order determination means determines that the game is not proceeding in a predetermined order during the high probability state (for example, a sequence error is generated). In time), and wherein the shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery that is performed in the normal state or the high RT state is won, it shifts to a specific effect state (so-called ART) in which information of advantageous stop operation is notified. In addition, if the second lottery is won during the high RT state, the state is shifted to the high probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is high. Therefore, the high RT state is set as a transition opportunity section to the specific effect state (ART). be able to.

  Here, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped during the high RT state (= high probability state), the RT ending means shifts the state from the high RT state to the normal state, but the symbol combination displayed by fraud or the like is zero. If it does (cannot be grasped), the high probability state will be temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and if it has not progressed in the predetermined order, the state is shifted to the low-probability state. Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is zeroed out, the high-probability state is not unduly maintained, and the player gains unjustified profits due to misconduct. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the low probability state, the first lottery is performed on condition that a predetermined winning combination (for example, a rare winning combination or more) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In the high probability state, the first lottery is performed on condition that any one of a plurality of winning combinations (eg, all winning combinations) including a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. It is characterized by

  According to such a gaming machine, in the high-probability state, the first lottery is performed based on more types of winning combinations than in the low-probability state, so that the high-probability state is unjustly maintained. And the player gets an unreasonable profit. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the high-probability state is unjustly maintained because the high-probability state is shifted to the low-probability state regardless of the symbol combination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting an unfair advantage due to an illegal act.

[Appendix 21]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and for example, in Patent Document (JP-A-2015-144940), a swaying effect (vibration) There is disclosed a gaming machine in which different image data are arranged and overlapped in a plurality of layers when performing display), and thereby the screen display can be appropriately rocked while preventing an increase in data capacity. ..

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, the production on the gaming machine is required to switch the production according to the progress of the game such as when the reel starts rotating or when the reel is stopped, but in Patent Document 1, the production is switched according to the progress of the game. Is not disclosed at all, and further improvement is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately switch the effect according to the progress of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an effect, and a first effect and a second effect that can be switched from the pre-switching effect to the post-switching effect according to the progress of the game. Effect selecting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for selecting an effect to be displayed in a predetermined game from a plurality of effects, and display control means for controlling the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selecting means ( For example, a sub-control circuit 101), and a detection unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that detects a request for switching the effect being displayed on the display unit according to the progress of the game (for example, a start command or a reel stop command). And the display control means, when the detection means detects the switching request, in the case where the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the changeover performance is performed. By switching from one layer for executing the effect to another layer for executing the effect after switching, the effect to be displayed on the display means is switched, and when the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means, it is the same. The effect displayed in the display means is switched by switching the effect to be executed in the layer from the effect before switching to the effect after switching.

  The game machine according to the present invention has a first effect in which the effect is switched according to the progress of the game by switching the layer in which the effect is being executed, and a second effect in which the effect is switched according to the progress of the game in the same layer. , And selects an effect to be displayed from a plurality of effects including the first effect and the second effect. Here, when the effect is switched by switching layers as in the first effect, the occurrence of image flickering before and after effect switching can be suppressed, but the effect must be executed in each layer. The processing load increases. On the other hand, when the effects to be executed in the same layer are switched as in the second effect, the processing load is suppressed, but image flickering may occur before and after the effects are switched.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a preferable switching method is set in advance for each effect in accordance with the connection of effects before and after switching, the processing load of each effect, and the like. Thereby, for example, a method of switching layers can be set for an effect (first effect) in which flickering is likely to occur before and after switching and which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. For effects that are not bothersome (second effect), it is possible to set a method of switching effects on the same layer. As a result, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the flickering when switching the effects, suppress the processing load, and cause a processing omission depending on the switching of the effects. This can be prevented, and as a result, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises an informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for urging the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the detecting means is configured to detect the first operation in response to the operation urged by the informing means. 1 switching request is detected, and the second switching request is detected in response to the progress of the game without the operation prompted by the notification means being performed, and the display control means causes the detection means to perform the first switching. When the request is detected, the effect displayed on the display means is switched from the pre-switch effect to the first post-switch effect in response to the first switch request, and when the detecting means detects the second switch request. According to the second switching request, the effect displayed on the display means is switched from the pre-switching effect to the second post-switching effect.

  In a game machine such as a pachi-slot machine or a pachinko machine, a player may be prompted to perform a button operation such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the button operation is performed. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effects to be switched can be made different depending on whether the button operation is performed or not, so that the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Even in this case, since a preferable switching method is set for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

[Appendix 22]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In the pachi-slot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, the random number is extracted and the lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled to drive a plurality of reels When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and in particular, in recent years, not only the display device but also other devices (for example, A game machine that produces an effect using a character is also known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200614 discloses a gaming machine that performs an effect and a display by interlocking a display device and a movable body that can move to a position where a part of the display device overlaps. There is.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In such a gaming machine, while the performance is being executed, the display device and other devices are linked to each other and no inconvenience occurs, but in a non-production state such as when various errors occur or when the menu screen is activated However, the presence of another device may make it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the display device (for example, notification of an error, display of a menu screen, etc.), and the presence of another device may be an obstacle.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not disturb the display of the display device.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an image, and a concave portion provided on the front surface of the display device and having a reflecting surface for reflecting light along a plate surface to the player side. A transmissive panel (for example, a light guide plate 401) on which a latent image (for example, a latent image 402) is formed by (for example, a reflective recess 402a) and a light emitting device (for example, an LED 403) that emits light along the plate surface of the transmissive panel. A display control means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for controlling display of the display device, a light emission control means (for example, a sub control circuit 101, a panel control board 79) for controlling light emission of the light emitting device, And a detection unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that detects a request to call an effect image (for example, an error notification screen or a menu screen), and the light emission control unit is based on the effect data. And a light emission output control means (for example, a panel control board 79) for causing the light emitting device to emit light in response to the output request of the effect execution means. Including, the light emission output control means, when the detection means detects a call request when accepting an output request from the effect execution means, prioritizes the call request over the output request and turns off the light emitting device, The effect executing means makes an output request of light emission based on effect data regardless of whether the detecting means detects a request for calling a non-effect image, and the display control means causes the detecting means to perform non-effect. When the image call request is detected, the non-effect image is displayed on the display device.

  According to such a gaming machine, the light emitting device emits a light beam to the transmissive panel provided on the front surface of the display device, so that an image corresponding to the latent image formed on the transmissive panel on the front surface of the display device. Is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect in cooperation with the display device and the transparent panel, and it is possible to perform the effect more effectively than in the case where the effect is simply performed on the display device. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, when there is a request for calling a non-effect image such as an error notification screen or a menu screen, the non-effect image is displayed on the display device and the light emitting device is turned off. Accordingly, when the non-effect image is displayed on the display device, the display of the display device is not disturbed, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the call request of the non-effect image is prioritized over the output request of the light emission. Therefore, even if there is a call request during execution of the effect using the transparent panel, the transparent panel The effect using is interrupted, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired. Further, since the output request of the light emission from the effect execution means to the light emission output control means is made regardless of the call request of the non-effect image, it is possible that there is a call request during the execution of the effect using the transparent panel. Also, since it is not necessary to add processing such as error processing to the effect processing itself, the processing can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be suppressed. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a call request is issued during execution of the effect using the transparent panel, internally, the animation of light emission based on the effect data is continued and the output of light emission is suppressed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the non-production image from being disturbed, and at the end of the display of the non-production image, the production using the transmissive panel can be restarted from the continuation of the internally continued processing. Therefore, an effective presentation using the display device and the transparent panel can be performed.

[Appendix 23]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a decorative portion according to the model of the gaming machine in order to enhance the playability. As the decorative portion, for example, there is one that performs a mechanical operation, light emission, or both, and such a decorative portion is generally called a "feature (movable accessory)". As a game machine using an accessory, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042691 discloses a game machine in which a rotating movable accessory is installed above a front door.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the movable accessory, the motor and the gear mechanism are consumed due to the load caused by the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, the occurrence of a failure makes it impossible to perform the effect specific to the movable accessory. This will give the player an unpleasant feeling. Therefore, a device capable of reducing the consumption of the movable accessory is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the consumption of the movable accessory.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. There are a plurality of movable parts (for example, the cover member 198) including an initial position (for example, a position where the eyeball main body 203 becomes invisible to the player) and a predetermined position (for example, a position where the eyeball main body 203 is exposed). A movable accessory (for example, a rotary accessory 200), and accessory control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a rotary accessory control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory. And a timer means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that measures a non-operation time indicating a period in which a player's operation is not accepted, and the accessory control means is movable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Ceremony The moving part is moved from the initial position to a predetermined position (for example, the position where the cover member 198 is in a semi-opened state), and the time measuring means sets the no-operation time when the movable part of the movable accessory moves to the predetermined position. When the no-operation time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), the accessory controlling means returns the movable part of the movable accessory to the initial position. Characteristic gaming machine.

  When the no-operation time reaches the predetermined time, it is highly possible that the player has not performed any operation and is not playing the game. In this way, if the characteristic effect of the movable accessory is continued even when the player is not playing the game, the movable accessory will be consumed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the no-operation time is predetermined. When the time is reached, the movable part of the movable accessory is returned to the initial position to reduce the consumption of the movable accessory. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of the movable accessory while improving the enjoyment of the game by a unique effect using the movable accessory.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition is that a state in which a game is played is the advantageous state, and a game start operation is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is performed during the advantageous state, the movable part of the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position, and a unique effect using the movable accessory is provided during the advantageous state. It can be performed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Appendix 24]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of information advantageous to the player so that the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is not lost. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which information that is advantageous to the player is notified with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player by performing the operation in (1).

  In a gaming machine equipped with such an ART function, a chance zone with a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed with a high probability of transition to the ART state if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. There is. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in a chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. As a winning combination, a gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability is disclosed.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In a gaming machine using a chance zone, there is also known a so-called completion type chance zone in which the game machine always shifts to an ART state when a predetermined number of games are played in the chance zone. However, in such a completion-type chance zone, the player simply wants to continue until the chance zone completes, and there is a problem that the playability in the chance zone becomes monotonous. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period which is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the number and the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91), and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to cause the symbol display means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbols, and the effect provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the line, the winning determination means for determining whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won ( For example, the main control circuit 91) and the lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-state) for starting the advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing the right granting lottery for granting the right to perform the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. In the control circuit 101) and the advantageous state lottery state, when the internal winning combination determination means determines the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination, the first right granting lottery that gives the right to perform the advantageous state with a predetermined probability (for example, A second right-granting lottery that performs a lottery to shift to ART in the middle of CZ) and gives a right to perform the advantageous state with a specific probability when a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. Advantageous state lottery means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for performing (for example, transfer lottery to ART performed at the time of completion of CZ), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. When indicated, or when the predetermined number of unit games have passed in the advantageous state lottery state, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state, and the advantageous state lottery means A right number management unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that counts the total number of times of the rights granted as the result of the first right granting lottery and the second right granting lottery, which has the advantageous state, and the advantageous state. When the lottery state is completed, an advantageous state control unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that executes the advantageous state for the total number of times counted by the right number management unit is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous-state lottery state (chance zone), the second right-granting lottery is carried out when the predetermined number of unit games that end the advantageous-state lottery state are performed. It is possible to realize a so-called completion-type chance zone in which lottery is carried out in an advantageous state at the time of completion. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first right-giving lottery is performed not only at the time of completion of the race but also when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous drawing lottery state. Not only the state lottery state is desired to continue, but also the first right grant lottery in the advantageous state lottery state is interested. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state lottery state, which is a trigger to shift to the advantageous state, and improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state lottery state. it can.

  In addition, the advantageous state lottery state may end when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. However, when it is possible to avoid displaying the predetermined symbol combination, the advantageous state lottery state does not end. Therefore, it is possible to continue the advantageous state lottery state according to the stop operation of the player, the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, during the advantageous state lottery state The interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state ends, the advantageous state is executed for the total number of times of the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the right grant lottery performed during the advantageous state lottery state. To do. Here, depending on the gaming machine, for example, there is also a gaming machine that grants only one right to perform the advantageous state during the advantageous state lottery state, but with such a gaming machine, the player is likely to feel dissatisfaction, and in particular, In the case of a completion-type chance zone (advantageous lottery state), even if the player continues for a long time until the completion of the race, only one right can be obtained, and the player's satisfaction is also halved. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the right grant lottery is won a plurality of times during the advantageous state lottery state, the player is given the right to perform the advantage state for a plurality of times. There is no dissatisfaction with the player. Also for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the advantageous state lottery state does not end when the first right grant lottery is performed, then the first right grant lottery and the second right grant lottery are performed. Further, since it is possible to receive the opportunity to receive, the player is strongly interested in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest of the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved.

  Also, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a higher probability that the probability of granting the right to perform the advantageous state in the first right grant lottery is higher than that of the gaming machine based on the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) that shifts to (for example, CZ mode 1) and a second mode that does not shift to a first mode in which the probability is higher than the first mode and the probability is lower than itself. And a mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, if the first mode shifts to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state, then the second mode does not shift to the first mode, so that the advantageous state lottery state has elapsed. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first right granting lottery increases. For the player, it is desirable that the advantageous state lottery state continues for a long time, so that the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. it can.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state, determines the number of times of transition of the unit game to transition from the first mode to the second mode. Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 for determining CZ_MAP), and a production means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11) that produces an effect in the second mode that is different from the first mode. It is characterized by further comprising.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can grasp or infer that the mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode from the rendering mode of the rendering means. The second mode is a mode in which there is a high probability that the right to perform the advantageous state is given, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state in the subsequent game, which is advantageous. The interest in the state lottery state can be improved.

1 ... Pachi-slot, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 200 ... Rotating accessory (movable type) Accessory), 91 ... Main control circuit, 101 ... Sub control circuit, 93 ... Main CPU, 102 ... Sub CPU

Claims (2)

A display device for displaying an image,
A transparent panel provided on the front surface of the display device;
A light emitting device which emits light along the plate surface of the transmission panel;
A light emission control means for controlling light emission of the light emitting device,
An operation means for receiving the operation of the player,
Menu display means for displaying a menu screen on the display device based on an operation by the operation means,
Detecting means for detecting a request for calling the menu screen,
Equipped with
The light emission control means,
Production execution means for making a light emission output request based on production data,
A light emission output control means for causing the light emitting device to emit light in response to an output request of the effect execution means,
When the detection unit detects a call request when the output request is received from the effect execution unit, the light emission output control unit turns off the light emitting device by prioritizing the call request over the output request in a specific area. Then, for the area other than the specific area, the light emitting device is caused to emit light in response to an output request,
The game machine characterized in that the effect execution means issues a light emission output request based on effect data, regardless of whether or not the detection means detects a request to call the menu screen. The light emission output control means restarts light emission in the specific region of the light emitting device when a predetermined time elapses after the detection means detects a request for calling the menu screen. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images